Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. and schedules required for a building project. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. 2D and 3D view. and residential. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. how to navigate the user interface. and plans.rte. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. 12 Select DefaultMetric. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. schedules. click Training Files. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the hierarchy of elements.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and open Metric\Templates. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. In this case. If you move the partition. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and click Open. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. hence. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. As you work in drawing and schedule views. the door retains this relationship to the partition. the floor or roof remains connected. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In the Revit Architecture model. drawings. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the parameter is one of association or connection. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. quantities. In this case. sections. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. construction. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. every drawing sheet. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. For most tutorial projects. scope. If the length of the elevation is changed. 13 Click OK. review the Revit Architecture templates. you will use the default template. You learn the terminology. drawing sheets. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. and customize the project as necessary. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. the operation of the software is parametric. and phases when you need it.

If you can draw. and 2D detail components. walls and roofs are hosts. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. and roofs are model elements. dimensions. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. and cabinets are model components. windows. and reference planes are datum elements.When you change something. tags. doors. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. dimensions. For example. They display in relevant views of the model. programming is not required. filled regions. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. For example. For example. Examples include detail lines. tags. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and keynotes are annotation elements. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. For example. levels. walls. windows. They help to describe or document the model. doors. grids. For example. Understanding the Basics | 7 . Datum elements help to define project context.

However. for example. section views. views of the project. Project: In Revit Architecture. This information includes components used to design the model. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. By using a single project file. or bottom of foundation.In Revit Architecture. elevation views. top of wall. schedules. floors. you must be in a section or elevation view. and so forth). such as roofs. The project file contains all information for the building design. To place levels. you do nothing to establish these relationships. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Often. and types. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. In other cases. and drawings of the design. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. Most often. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. families. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. from geometry to construction data. you can explicitly control them. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. first floor. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. for example. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. and ceilings. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. For example. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. making it easy to understand what each button represents. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. In the following illustration. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. specifically its clear user interface. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. identical use. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. ceilings. System families include walls. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. dimensions. floors.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. roofs. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. For example. In the steps that follow. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. A type can also be a style. the user interface is labeled. A type can be a specific size of a family. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. System families can be transferred between projects. and levels. For example. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . categories of model elements include walls and beams. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. However. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. and similar graphical representation. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use.

new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. By default. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. click (New). the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. In addition. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . This creates a new project based on the default template.

Many of the commands have shortcut keys. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . The toolbar buttons represent common commands. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. and View. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. which are listed on the menu. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. For example.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. you type the required key combination to perform the command. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. While working in the drawing area. Edit. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click.

when you add a door. 9 In the Type Selector. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . When you select the Door tool. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. For example. On the left side of the Options Bar. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. a door type is specified.

In the drawing area. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . immediately below the Type Selector. containing buttons grouped by function.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar.

14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. select Views (all). Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. click the tab in the Design Bar. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. In the Project Browser.11 Click OK. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.

Navigating the User Interface | 15 . ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. To open a view.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. double-click its name. reports. windows). sheets. and rename views. The browser is dockable. elevations. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. schedules. families. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. family category (doors. delete. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 3D). families. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. and groups. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. and group name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. walls.

Do not click. In this case. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. In the bottom left corner of the window.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click Cancel. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction ." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. After creating a browser organization scheme. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. The cursor displays as a pencil. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next.

If no Help button displays. In the status bar. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. The status bar also provides information. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. 20 Press TAB.18 On the Design Bar. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. Tooltips: To see tooltips. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. regarding selected elements in a view. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. Click the Help button. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. Toolbar: From the toolbar. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. When you place the cursor over an element. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. click Modify to end the Wall command. You can also press SHIFT+F1. It highlights when the cursor is over it. press F1 for help. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. find a keyword on the Index tab. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). After you are familiar with these tasks. In addition. Windows: From any window. in conjunction with tooltips. There are several tools that help you find information. You can use this tri-pane. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. press F1 for context-sensitive help. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. click on the Standard toolbar. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol.

Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. In the following steps. There are several ways to access zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. In the drawing area. 5 On the View toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. For example. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction .rvt. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. the view zooms out from the building model. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. click Training Files. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x).

11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. the view zooms in on the selected area. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . this is referred to as a crossing selection. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. As you move the mouse. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 10 To display SteeringWheels. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. When you release the mouse button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. on the View toolbar. 7 Click in the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. . Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.

Cnst. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. click Settings menu ➤ Options. and select the wall. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. bottoms. and then using the Zoom tool again. referred to as shape handles. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. Small blue dots. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and click the SteeringWheels tab. press ESC. as shown. To define settings for SteeringWheels. called drag controls. moving the wheel to the desired location. 17 Type ZR. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. display along the ends. and double-click 2nd Flr. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 15 To exit the wheel. When drawing or modifying a building model. For more information about SteeringWheels. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and click Help. These are the drag controls. Similar controls.

such as Move and Copy. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . and on the Tools toolbar. click to specify the starting position. 23 Click next to the lower wall. In this case. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. for example. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. After selecting the element to move. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. as shown. require 2 clicks to complete the command. click (Move). The table moves down. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. and click again to specify the ending position.18 Click and drag the left control. Some commands. you want to move the table closer to the wall. to lengthen the wall. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan.

or press CTRL+Z. 26 On the Undo menu. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. Some commands. click the Undo command.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. All changes you make to a project are tracked. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. such as the Lines command. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. click Lines. and click again to end it. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Move. on the Standard toolbar. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. and drag it on top of the table. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. select the second item in the list. In this example. 24 Select the plant.

Press ESC twice. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. On the Design Bar.29 To end the command. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. click Modify.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. and annotate building assemblies. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. 27 . this tutorial uses imperial units only. or referenced as a drafting view. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. detail. In this tutorial. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. Use detail components to define an assembly. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. In Revit Architecture. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. illustrating how building components work together.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. When you have finished these tutorials. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. but for training purposes. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view.

■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. you will create a drafting view. click Training Files. scroll until the folder is displayed. import a DWG detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Drafting View. and reference a drafting view.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. enter Window Head Detail. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.rvt. If necessary. create a reference callout. for Name. 3 In the Scale list. 2 In the Drafting View dialog.

drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. 9 Type ZR. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. located directly to the left of the drawing area.In the Project Browser. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. The model zooms out. displaying the extents of the detail. select Black and White. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. and click Open. as shown. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.dwg. 10 In the drawing area. click Training Files. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. 6 In the Colors field list. The drawing area is still blank. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 .). 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1.

click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. 12 On the Options Bar. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . in the Type Selector. select Detail View: Detail. 13 Click Reference other view. 14 In the drawing area.The view displays to the specified area. and in the Scale list. click Callout. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. to activate the view selection list.

c_express_workshop_details_start. double-click the reference callout tag head. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. adjust the detail view display settings. select Detail View: Detail. and in the Scale list. select Callout. 2 On the Options Bar. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area.rvt. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. in the Type Selector. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.The reference callout is created. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. 3 In the drawing area. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . you will create a detail view defined by a callout. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.

enter Wall Base 1. click Modify to clear the selection. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 6 In the drawing area. 4 Right-click Detail 0. under Detail Views (Detail). 5 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Wall Base 1.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. and click Rename. under Detail Views(Detail). for Name. and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. Model-Based Detailing | 33 .The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. bordered by a solid line. This is the view crop region. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region.

14 In the drawing area. select As Underlay. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. for Display Model.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Click OK. 13 On the View Control Bar. right-click. and click OK. under Graphics. click (Hide Crop Region). allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click View Properties.

Directly above the drawing area. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. type 1' 6''. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. on the Options Bar. Stud.Brick on Mtl. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. 20 In the drawing area. 17 On the View Control Bar. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . typical details can easily be placed. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . and press ENTER. If the crop region is enlarged. 19 In the Type Selector. By grouping detail components. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. click Detail Components. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model.

■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. add the following detail components as shown. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click Create Instance. click Modify to end the command. 25 In the Project Browser. as shown. 23 Using the same method. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components.

4" Slab detail. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.28 Press ESC to end the command. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .

click Keynote ➤ Element. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Leader. click Training Files. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. and verify that Horizontal. 4 On the Options Bar. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. and under Keynote Table.rvt.txt. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. For more information about customizing a keynote database. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. In the next exercise.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. special notes. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. click Browse. You can customize this list. for Full Path. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . consistent means of identifying building assembly components. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. in the type selector. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. or instructions within a construction documentation package. c_express_workshop_details_start. map keynotes by material. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. and Free End are selected. and format keynote styles.

Keynoting | 39 . If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. 9 Press ESC to end the command.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. 8 Click to place the tag. 7 Click to place the leader arm. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader.5 In the drawing area. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. If no value has been specified. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. Either move the text inside. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. a question mark displays. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard .

13 Click to place the tag. 16 In the drawing area. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. and click OK. click Keynote ➤ Material. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 12 Click to place the leader arm. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 15 Select 07 21 00. 14 In the Keynotes dialog.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation.

You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 17 On the Options Bar. legends.Boxed. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. Click Check None. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . 19 In the Type Selector. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. Select Keynote Tags. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. Click OK. Only the keynotes remain selected. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values.All items within the selection display in red.

you will create a sheet. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. this tutorial uses imperial units only. but for training purposes. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Place views on drawing sheets. Update drawing sheet and project information. and modify and update the project sheet title block. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. In this lesson. In this exercise. update the project information element properties. Add labels to a title block.

3 Click OK. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. In Revit Architecture.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. In the Project Browser. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. click Training Files. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. scroll until the folder is displayed. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. If necessary. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). or in the element properties of the title block. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

under Sheets(all). roll the wheel. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Checker. To zoom in and out. hold down the wheel and drag. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. In this tutorial. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. 6 In the Title Block. To pan. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. you can enter ZE to zoom out. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area.4 Type ZR.Unnamed. 9 In the Project Browser. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. Then. enter Sections/Details. Smith and press ENTER. right-click A602 . For Name. enter A602. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. 5 In the drawing area. Click OK. click Modify to clear the selection. and click Rename. 7 Enter K.

12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 20 Click and type Project Status. click Text.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Project Status. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. 13 Click OK. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. 16 Type ZR. select the title block. For Project Name. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. For Client Name. 17 On the Design Bar. select Text : 1/8''. (Left) is selected. The Family Editor opens. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter J. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . 15 In the Options Bar. enter 4/10/2008. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. Smith. 18 On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector. enter Design Development.

26 In the Edit Label dialog. in the Type Selector. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click (Load into Project). 23 On the Design Bar. select Label : 3/16''. as shown. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. and click.21 On the Design Bar. and verify that (Top) are selected. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. under Category Parameters. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . as shown. click Modify to exit the command. click Label. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. 29 On the Design Bar. to add 28 Using the same method. 22 Using the same method. add Project Issue Date parameter.

for Full Path. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. Next you will create. for Name. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . representing the view or schedule. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. select Override parameter values of existing types. to a drawing sheet. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Project. place and modify a keynote legend. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. enter Keynote Legend .txt. and under Keynote Table.30 In the Reload Family dialog. a viewport displays. you will create. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. In this exercise. and click Yes. click Training Files. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. click Browse.

8 In the Project Browser. and drag Keynote Legend .Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area.Sections/Details. under Sheets (all). Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. as shown. on the Appearance tab.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. under Text. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . clear Show Headers. double-click A601 . expand Legends. and click OK. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.

and zoom in on the Keynote Legend .Project as shown. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. The keynote legend is visible. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet.

NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. for View Name. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . not keynotes.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown.Sheet. The Keynote Legend is now blank. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. and click Properties. for Filter. and click OK. expand Detail Views (Detail). 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. at the bottom of the Filter tab. right-click Keynote Legend . and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet.Project. click Edit. as shown. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Click OK twice. under Legends. 15 In the Project Browser. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. select Filter by sheet. enter Keynote Legend .

and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. under Sheets (all). displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. and then add and update a Drawing list. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . The view title with line displays below the viewport. The view remains selected. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A0 . 2 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet 1. as shown. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise.The keynote legend is automatically updated.

sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. 5 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. and zoom in on the drawing list. expand Schedules/Quantities. Revit Architecture displays a view title. You can specify text attributes for view titles. as shown. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . or omit view titles from sheets. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. 3 In the Type Selector. Press ESC to clear the selection. define the information to include in a view title. 6 Type ZR. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. As part of a construction document set. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. The drawing list remains selected.When you place a view on a sheet. by default.

Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select A602 . The drawing list display is updated.Ceiling Plans. under Sheets (all).Sections/Details and select A801 . You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. right-click the selected sheets. under Identity Data. and click Properties. including only sheets that contain views. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . clear Appears In Drawing List. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Project Browser. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. while pressing SHIFT.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. a curtain wall. a central service core. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. 57 .Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. it is good practice to test the constraints. After the beginning exercises. If the grid moves. As you develop the building design. the wall or column will move with it. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. For example. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building.

under Create new. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. The new project opens. with an RVT extension. select Project. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. levels. In views that display elevation markers. you load any required family type that is not in your project. you will use the default template. South. such as a door or window. click New. but contains no geometry. and residential. click Training Files. from the product library. you design inside the elevation markers. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. The project is stored as a single file. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. 5 Click OK. East. West. construction. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. you use a template that is provided with the software. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . verify that the second option is selected. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. For this project. notice four elevation markers.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. and click Browse. Creating the Project In this exercise. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. views. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. In practice. 2 In the New Project dialog. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. under Projects. and settings. and customize the project as necessary. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. 3 Under Template file. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building.rte. locate the Project Browser. To create the project file. In the drawing area in the right pane. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units.

and elevation views created in the project by the template.rvt) is selected. Groups. expand Views (all). You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. Schedules/Quantities. and click Training Files. Two level lines. verify that Project Files (*. You can add. as well as change their names. These views are customizable: you can rename them. Sheets (all). and other properties. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. such as schedules and legends. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. heights. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). reflected ceiling plan views. display in the south elevation. Ceiling Plans. sheets. the view you see in the drawing area. and on the General tab. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. As you design and document your building model. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. 15 For Save as type. enter Revit Retail Building. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. 10 In the Project Browser. notice the Legends. Families. schedules. Creating the Project | 59 . The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. and delete them. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. duplicate them. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 13 In the file window. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. view the Save reminder interval. content and building model reports. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. double-click South. change their properties. then expand Floor Plans. NOTE If you create a project without a template. 14 For File name. created by the template. and duplicate levels. double-click Metric. you will want to save your work frequently. delete. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 8 Under Floor Plans. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. will be accessible from the Project Browser. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. and families in your project. 7 If necessary. and Elevations (Building Elevation). This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. 16 Click Save.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current.

or constrained. and double-click South. so that when one level moves.17 Proceed to the next exercise. When you begin designing. the other levels move and change with it. After you modify the two default levels. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. expand Views (all). TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. to each other. You change the names of the 2 default levels. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. Adding Project Levels on page 60. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). doors. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. enter 00 Foundation. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. You learn how the levels are locked. and windows within the building model. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. and press ENTER. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

view the Design Bar. and click Basics. As you move the cursor. and press ESC. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. enter 01 Entry Level. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. enter -1800. not all the tabs are visible. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. and press ENTER. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. 13 On the Options Bar. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. Adding Project Levels | 61 . 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. which should display by default. enter 0. 5 In the Project Browser.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. 14 Click Plan View Types. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. right-click. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. This is the Options Bar. Next. and then move it up. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. By default. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. 16 Enter 3750. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. click Level. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. If it does not. and click OK. When you add the new level. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands.

click (Pick Lines). and for Offset. and move it slightly upward. Next. and rename the corresponding views. and enter 02 Level. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. 23 On the Options Bar. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. using a different option. 26 Press ESC. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. click Modify to end the command. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 In the Project Browser. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 19 Click OK. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 3. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference.18 In the Project Browser. or on the Design Bar. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. click Rename. you add another level. If you create a level by copying it. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. click Level. enter 3750. 25 Click to place the level line. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view.

Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. Adding Project Levels | 63 . Notice that by moving the top level. the levels are no longer constrained. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. and you can move them independently. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. as shown. If you select a level and click its lock. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. all the levels move. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line.

3 On the Options Bar. click Grid. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. In the following exercise. click Modify. the column height changes as well. In a later exercise. under Floor Plans.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. double-click 00 Foundation. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. select (Draw). you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. so that if the roof elevation changes. Move the cursor up. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. specify a start point for the grid line. On the Design Bar. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. When the grid is complete.

Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. Click to place the grid line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. click (Pick Lines). enter 4500 mm. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. and click to place the line. and click to place the line. enter 7500 mm. On the Options Bar. for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. enter 7500 mm. for Offset. Next. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . and press ENTER. and for Offset. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. and click to place the line. click Grid. Enter A.

specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid.8 Press ESC. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. 11 On the Design Bar. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. click Grid. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. as shown. and specify the grid line endpoint. On the Options Bar. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. click Grid. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.

Creating a Column Grid | 67 . select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. click (Aligned). 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. click Dimension. 22 While pressing CTRL. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. select grid lines C and 3. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 18 On the Design Bar. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 15 Starting with grid line A. 21 Press ESC twice. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line.

If necessary. Two pins display on the grid lines. 24 Press ESC. 30 In the Type Properties dialog.5mm Bubble with Gap. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. 33 On the Design Bar. and press ESC. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. click Duplicate. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. enter 6. and click OK. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. until it is closer to grid line A. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. and on the Options Bar. until it is closer to grid line 5. click .23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. 31 For End Segments Length. and press ESC. (Element Properties). 26 In the drawing area. click Modify. click Edit/New. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. At the left endpoint of the grid line. 32 Click OK twice. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. 29 In the Name dialog. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click the value for Center Segment. By pinning these central grid lines. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. click and drag the blue circular grip up. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and select None. and select grid line A. select grid line 5. enter 50mm. The pins are hidden.

click Modify. select all of the grid lines. For Place By. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . click Structural Column. select Grid : 6. 37 Select the grid lines again. and in the Type Selector.5mm Bubble with Gap. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). select Grid : 6. click (Grid Intersection). 39 In the Type Selector.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. and press ESC. The original continuous grid lines are restored. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. 36 On the Design Bar. 35 In the Type Selector.5mm Bubble. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. click Finish. and on the Options Bar.

46 On the Options Bar. for From. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. 52 On the Options Bar.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 48 On the Standard toolbar. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. double-click 01 Entry Level. 45 While pressing CTRL. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. lock it. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. click Activate Dimensions. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. select 01 Entry Level. Next. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. and unlock it. 43 Press ESC. If it is unlocked. under Floor Plans. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 47 Enter 9000. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select grid line A. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. click Camera. and press ENTER. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

Creating a Column Grid | 71 . and click to place the target point of the camera.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays.

55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. named 3D View 1 by default. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. Adding Beams on page 72. When you finish adding beams. Adding Beams In this exercise. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. In the Rename View dialog. Right-click 3D View 1. and then copy them to subsequent levels. displays in bold under 3D Views. The current view. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. enter To Building. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 57 Proceed to the next exercise. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. and click Rename. expand 3D Views. under Views (all). and click OK.

5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The view is currently set to Coarse. the icon on the right side of the scale. view the icons on the View Control Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. click Finish. Adding Beams | 73 . verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. 9 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Type Selector. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. under 3D Views. 4 Click Medium. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . 7 On the Options Bar. select each grid line. click Beam. under Floor Plans. double-click To Building to view all of the beams.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. The selected grid lines display as red. click (Create Beam On Grid). The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 8 While pressing CTRL. 10 In the Project Browser.

All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. 14 Select one of the beams. right-click. and click Select All Instances. 13 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. and click OK. select 06 Roof. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Floor Plans. 12 On the View toolbar. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View). select 02 Level. press and hold SHIFT. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. double-click 01 Entry Level.

22 On the Options Bar. 06 Roof. double-click To Building. 20 Click Cancel. and click Select All Instances. 25 In the Project Browser. select 06 Roof. for Top Level.to the 5th level. (Element Properties). and click OK. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. view the Top Level parameter. and if necessary. When you created the columns. under 3D Views. click 24 Press ESC. 21 With the column selected. and click Element Properties. under Constraints. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Beams | 75 . You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. right-click. under Instance Parameters. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. resize the view to see the entire structure. All of the columns display as red. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. right-click.

on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. as lines only. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Elevations. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. but you want to display them in less detail. 28 Save the drawing. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. double-click South. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view.

Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. click Framing Elevation. double-click 00 Foundation. To better add the braces to the structure. and press ESC to end the command. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Braces In this exercise. Adding Braces | 77 . Adding Braces on page 77. you create 8 framing elevation views. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure.29 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans.

6 Select the crop region (if necessary). NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. double-click the elevation marker arrow. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 11 Using the same technique. After you add the final brace. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . but when placed the braces are placed.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. The associated framing elevation view displays. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. 7 On the Design Bar. click Brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. and when the endpoint snap displays. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. click to specify the start point of the brace. 8 In the Type Selector. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. press ESC twice. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected.

IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. and press ENTER. Adding Braces | 79 . The height of the roof lowers. enter 18000 mm.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. delete it and redraw it.

enter 10000 mm. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. 14 On the Standard toolbar. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. and press ENTER. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. but this time add them from right to left. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

19 In the Project Browser. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). double-click 00 Foundation. 21 Select grid line A. click Activate Dimensions. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. as shown in the 3D view below. Adding Braces | 81 .Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. and on the Options Bar. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. NOTE As you add braces. enter 12000 mm. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. under Floor Plans. and press ENTER. 23 In the Project Browser.

29 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. Test connectivity of the columns. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. 31 Save the drawing. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 00 Foundation. click and roof height. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. beams. 26 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Standard toolbar. lock it. and if necessary.24 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. and drag it away from the structure. Creating a Foundation on page 82. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. double-click South. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. under Elevations. grid size. double-click {3D}.

and click View Properties. Creating a Foundation | 83 . double-click 00 Foundation. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.Before you can add the pile caps. for Level. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. under Extents. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. expand Families. 9 Close the warning dialog. and how to load specific families into a project. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. select Unlimited. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. The foundation pile cap now displays. and press ESC twice. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. Click OK twice. and expand Structural Foundations. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser.rfa. click Edit. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. In the View Range dialog. under View Depth. After you load the pile cap family. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. A warning displays. In the Element Properties dialog. and drag it to the drawing area. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. for View Range. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. The pile cap has been added in the view.

press ESC twice. under 3D Views.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . When the final pile cap is placed. and click Create Similar. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 13 In the Project Browser. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation.

and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. beams. beam. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click {3D}. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. right-click. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. you change the types of the columns. and click Select All Instances.14 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. 2 Select one of the columns. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. and brace families into the project. click Training Files.rvt. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. You load new column. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . and braces that you used to create the building structure. All columns in the building model display as red. under 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

The building model displays the round hollow columns. double-click Elevation 1-a. under Elevations (Interior Elevation).2X101. but it is the only size of its type currently available. In the following steps. 6 In the Type Selector. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. and click OK. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. 13 In the Name dialog. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar.5CHS. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. right-click. 17 While pressing CTRL. click Modify. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. the braces as well as the beams change. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. for d. 10 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model.9. click (Default 3D View). 4 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. and click Select All Instances. for Type. click Modify. enter 75mm. 7 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. you change the brace type. click Modify.6X15. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. and changing its size parameter. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 15 In the Project Browser. This not the size that you want to use. 19 On the Design Bar. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. enter 75mm. select the braces in the elevation one by one. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. under Dimensions. and click OK twice. click Duplicate. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Brace.3 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Type Selector. The brace type changes. click (Element Properties).

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. select Auto .rvt. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.rvt. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. After the files are linked. 3 Under Positioning. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. click Training Files.Origin to Origin. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. select m_RRB_structure_complete. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. and click Open. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model.

the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. and walls could also be copy/monitored. click Copy. double-click South.4 In the Project Browser. 6 In the drawing area. After the link is established. 9 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar. and click Select Link. structural members. select Levels 00 through 06. while pressing CTRL. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. 5 On the Tools toolbar. In this case. select Multiple. under Elevations. however. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. click (Copy/Monitor). depending on the project. Grids. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. select the linked Revit model.

you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. 15 In the New Plan dialog. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click Delete. 18 Using the same method.10 On the Options Bar. First. right-click Level 1. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. click OK. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. under Floor Plans. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. for Floor Plan views. click Finish. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. delete the Level 2 floor plan. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . 16 Click OK. click Finish mode. while pressing SHIFT. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). 13 On the Design Bar. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information.

double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. select the Topography : Surface. right-click. right-click. enter Floor Plans.19 In the Project Browser. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. 20 In the drawing area. click OK. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 24 In the New View Template dialog. 21 In the drawing area. 26 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. 25 In the View Templates dialog. under Floor Plans. for Name. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

34 In the 3D view that displays. under Names. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . under Floor Plans. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. double-click Site. and click OK. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. select Floor Plans.

you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. and click Rename. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand 3D Views. Adding Floors on page 92. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. In this exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. right-click 3D View 1. 36 In the Rename View dialog. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . To create floors. and railings are also created from sketches. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. Adding Floors In this exercise. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. stairs. enter To Building. and click OK. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.35 In the Project Browser. such as roofs. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Some other Revit Architecture elements.

Move the cursor to the left. and then the first horizontal grid line. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. and elements in the current view display as gray. Do not lock the dimension. On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. If the grid changes size. On the Sketch tab. past the first vertical grid line. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. At the top left corner of the grid. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Dimension. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You are now in the Sketch Editor. select the top floor line. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. under Floor Plans. Leave this dimension unlocked. click Lines. Adding Floors | 93 . and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. click Floor. click (Rectangle).

6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ 7 On the Design Bar. and click the temporary dimension value. Do not lock the dimensions.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. press ENTER. Select and lock the dimensions. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. At the top left corner of the grid. click Modify. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. and then press ESC. and change their values to 300 mm. select the top floor line. Enter 300. They display on the floor sketch. Move the cursor to the left dimension. click Finish Sketch to create the floor.

You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. Adding Floors | 95 . you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. click Lines. and press ESC. On the Options Bar. On the Sketch tab. and for Offset. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser.8 Select the floor. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. enter 1500mm. double-click 02 Level. click Edit. Next. on the Design Bar. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. and on the Options Bar. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Floor. and lock the dimensions. under Floor Plans. click Quit Sketch. using a different sketching technique. click (Pick Lines). Select the three remaining floor lines. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid.

Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. click Lines. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 17 On the Sketch tab. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. click Floor. click Finish Sketch. and a lock icon displays. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 18 On the Options Bar. double-click 03 Level. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. 20 On the Tools toolbar. The 02 Level floor displays. 16 On the Design Bar.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. Click the locks to constrain the floors. click (Rectangle). click (Align). The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. under Floor Plans. 14 On the Design Bar.

dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and lock the edges. Alternatively. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and on the Options Bar. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. select 05 Roof Garden. double-click 01 Entry Level. 31 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Edit. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. under Floor Plans. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. double-click {3D}. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Adding Floors | 97 .24 On the Design Bar. under Views ➤ 3D Views. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. and click OK. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 32 Select the floor. click Finish Sketch. 35 On the Sketch tab. click Finish Sketch.

and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. and press ENTER. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. click Training Files. click to place the roof line. Adding a Roof on page 98. In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. enter 1800 mm. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof.rvt. Adding a Roof In this exercise. To create the roof. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Click (Pick Lines). 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. When a blue dashed line displays. ■ ■ For Offset. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Lines. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 06 Roof. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser.

9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). for Offset. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. and when the blue dashed line displays. click to place the roof line. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). enter 300 mm.6 Select grid line 5. 7 On the Options Bar. Adding a Roof | 99 .

■ 12 On the Design Bar. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. click Finish Roof. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. select the roof. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar.10 Press ESC. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. click (Trim/Extend). Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. click Modify. enter -100 mm. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify the section. for Elevation. Adding a Roof | 101 . and press ENTER. 17 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. click Section.14 On the Options Bar. on grid D. move the cursor down below the roof. click (Add new points to the slab shape). 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4.

for Structure [1]. for Structure. double-click 06 Roof. In section. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 30 Click OK 3 times. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. under Construction. click Edit. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. click Modify. select Variable. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. (Element Properties). you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 24 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog.20 On the Design Bar. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. select the roof. click Edit/New. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped.

zoom in to the roof. Adding a Roof | 103 . click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. and press DELETE. on the View Control Bar. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. select Fascia : Fascia . 40 In the Type Selector. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.Roof Edge. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. 37 If necessary. 41 Starting with the left front edge. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. select the section line. In this case. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. 38 In the 3D view. click Modify. select each edge. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. click OK. 33 In the warning dialog.31 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). moving counter-clockwise. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path.

Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. so if you resize the grid. click Modify. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser.42 On the Design Bar. double-click To Building. the curtain wall resizes with it. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you add a curtain wall. under 3D Views.

8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 10 When a blue dashed line displays. Click OK twice.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. select 05 Roof Garden. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). for Join Condition. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. enter 1050 mm. click Edit/New. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. For Height. Under Construction. for Type. enter Retail Storefront. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. and click OK. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click 01 Entry Level. The type is saved in the project. click Training Files. For Offset. select 01 Entry Level. and move it slightly toward the building interior. enter 600 mm. click Wall. select Horizontal Grid Continuous.rvt. 6 In the Name dialog. When you duplicate a type. For Level. for Spacing. enter 2100 mm. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. for Spacing. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. click to place the first curtain wall segment. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall.

click Dimension. These dimensions are not in a sketch. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 15 On the View Control Bar. and lock the dimensions. If the grid moves. and trim each curtain wall segment. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. under 3D Views. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. double-click To Building. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. you can delete the dimensions. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 On the Design Bar. If you want to hide them. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. click (Trim/Extend).11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . so they remain in the view.

Creating an Entrance In this exercise. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Creating an Entrance on page 107. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. Creating an Entrance | 107 . click Training Files.

and click None. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click All. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. 6 Under Visibility. clear one element to clear all the elements. under Views (all). select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. 7 Click OK. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 2 On the View Control Bar. To better work with the curtain wall panels. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. Do not select Columns. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under the element list.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. All the elements in the list are selected. and double-click South. 4 On the Model Categories tab. as these usually represent internal pilasters. 5 Under Visibility. click Detail Level ➤ Medium.

16 On the View Control Bar. 18 On the View Control Bar.9 On the Design Bar. in this case an architectural elevation. and click OK. in the Type Selector. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. 17 In the Project Browser. 10 Select 1 panel. 12 With the panels selected. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. select System Panel : Solid. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. Creating an Entrance | 109 . and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. select Architectural Elevation. press and hold CTRL.

double-click South. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 20 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building.19 In the Project Browser. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown.

25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 30 On the Design Bar. and unpin it. click Modify. 32 In the Type Selector. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 27 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select another mullion to the right. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. click Curtain Grid. Creating an Entrance | 111 . click Add or Remove Segments. and click to select it. 24 On the Options Bar. select One Segment.

36 Zoom in to the first panel. click (Default 3D View). 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select it. press TAB until it is selected.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. and unpin it. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. and view the new entrance. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 34 On the View toolbar.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance.38 Press DELETE. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. 39 Using the same process. remove the mullions from the 2nd. and 4th panels. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. 3rd. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. open the North elevation. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. 40 Optionally.

select 02 Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click View Properties. for Underlay. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. 3 Right-click in the view. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. 5 Click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. under Graphics.

and click OK. enter Display Area. 10 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. which indicates you must draw the callout. and click Rename. and click to complete the callout. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . 8 Select the callout. 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. select the grip closest to the callout head. click Callout. The cursor changes to a pencil. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column.

right-click. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Flip Section. as shown. 12 Draw a section line. 16 Select the section box. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. click Section. 14 Press ESC.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 Select the section line.

select Finish Face: Exterior. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Click (Rectangle). and click Rename. 27 On the Options Bar. click Wall. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. click (Align). Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 .17 In the Project Browser.135mm Partition (2-hr). 25 Press ESC twice. Lock both alignments. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). click Dimension. 18 In the Rename View dialog. select Basic Wall : Interior . For Loc Line. select Wall faces. expand Sections (Building Section). for Prefer. 26 On the Design Bar. enter Section Display Area. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 21 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. right-click Section 1.

31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. and lock the dimension. double-click 01 Entry Level. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and lock the dimension. 32 In the Type Selector. click Ceiling. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. under Ceiling Plans. Next. under Sections (Building Section). you modify them to be bulkhead walls. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode.) 36 Press ESC twice. 37 In the Project Browser. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. 38 On the View Control Bar. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. double-click Section Display Area.

■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. enter 2700 mm. click to select it. under Constraints. click Modify. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. press TAB until you select the wall chain. and press ESC. under Ceiling Plans.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. click Attach. under Constraints. click (Element Properties). under Sections. On the Options Bar. and click to select the walls. for Top/Base. 47 In the Project Browser. and click (Element Properties). and click to select the walls. enter 2700 mm. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. double-click Section Display Area. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. 41 On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. 43 On the Design Bar. 46 Press ESC. for Base Offset. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . Select the 02 Level Floor. and click OK. for Height Offset From Level. 42 In the Element Properties dialog.

and click . double-click 01 Entry Level.49 In the Project Browser. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Type. under Ceiling Plans. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. click Edit. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. 54 Click OK. click Cancel. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 58 On the Edit toolbar. for Structure. under Construction. click (Rotate). view the ceiling structure. click Cancel. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling.

61 Press ESC. enter 45.60 Click. and press ENTER. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 .

click Shadows On. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 64 On the View Control Bar. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. 66 Optionally. under 3D Views. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. click Shadows Off. double-click To Building. 65 On the View Control Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Move the cursor over grid line B.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . and for Offset. double-click 01 Entry Level. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click to create a reference plane to the right. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). and copy it to the 05 Level. and click to create a reference plane to the left. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. 3 On the Options Bar. enter 1500 mm. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Ref Plane.rvt.

and 3. click Stairs. shorten the right reference plane. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. C. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. and specify a point to create first stair flight. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. 7 Using the same method. click Modify. 6 Select the left reference plane. 2. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining.5 On the Design Bar. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. The complete stair displays. and specify a point. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. beyond the end of the stair. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. 12 In the Type Selector. Move the cursor down. click Wall. including its handrails.225mm Masonry. and select the 2nd reference plane. select Basic Wall : Generic . Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. Click (Rectangle). ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . select Finish Face: Interior. 10 On the Options Bar.

click Dimension. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. Lock the dimension. click Align. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. and specify a point away from the wall. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to select it. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. Click Modify. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. 18 Using the same technique. and lock the alignment. enter 1200 mm. select the dimension value. Select the wall. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. for Prefer.15 On the Tools toolbar. Select the bottom of the stair. select Wall faces. Select the interior face of the wall.

TIP To flip the door swing. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. Because the dimension is constrained. 27 In the Type Selector. 25 While pressing CTRL. and press DELETE. a warning displays. and press DELETE. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. click Door. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. (Undo). 23 Select the stair. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. 28 On the Options Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . 24 On the Standard toolbar. clear Tag on Placement.21 Select the dimension. select both reference planes. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. The stair and walls move to the left.

42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). click 36 On the View toolbar. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). select 00 Foundation. For Top Constraint. click Align. 33 Select the stair. and move the cursor to spin the building model. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Multistory Top Level. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. select all 4 walls. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors.30 On the Design Bar. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. 35 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Click OK. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. Under Constraints. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. click Modify. but if you view the top level of the building. 44 On the Tools toolbar. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. Click OK. for Base Constraint. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. (Element Properties). (Rectangle). select 05 Roof Garden. (Default 3D View). ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected.

47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 .46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. (SteeringWheels). Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. on the View toolbar. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. and lock the alignment. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). and click OK. click see the roof. and lock the alignments.

double-click 01 Entry Level. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Under Constraints. for Base Offset. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. For Top Constraint. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.55 In the Project Browser. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 56 Select the shaft. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. and click OK. By offsetting the base. (SteeringWheels). click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. enter 300 mm. (Default 3D View). click 59 On the View toolbar.

and click View Properties. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Graphics. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. 2 Right-click in the view.rvt. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select 06 Roof.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Wall. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. for Underlay. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 05 Roof Garden.

and click Open View. 11 In the Go To View dialog. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. The exact placement is not important. select Basic Wall : Generic .225mm Masonry. 15 In the error dialog. click . click (Align). 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall.5 In the Type Selector. select Elevation: South. click Lines. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. click Remove Constraints. enter 9750. and on the Options Bar. click Edit Profile. and press ENTER. and click (Fillet arc). 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. 17 On the Options Bar. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and then select the right face of the wall.

as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . under 3D Views. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. 22 In the Project Browser. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. click . double-click {3D}. click Finish Sketch. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. and click (Circle).18 In the upper right corner of the profile.

Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. 24 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Component. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser.5 Meters.4. 6 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Type Selector. and press ESC twice. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . select M_RPC Tree . select Planter : 1220 x 1220.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . and open Metric\m_RRB_host. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. In the left pane of the Open dialog. between grid lines C and D. click Training Files.rvt. 5 On the Basics tab. click Component. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. as shown. TIP After you place the 1st planter.

click Duplicate. and on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. enter Japanese Cherry 1. (Element Properties). For Offset. select the 2 remaining trees. as shown. click Floor. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. for Height. and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_RPC Tree .5 Meters. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 17 While pressing CTRL. 21 On the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. under 3D Views. 10 In the Project Browser. under Dimensions. enter 1500 mm.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1.8 On the View toolbar. 11 Select one of the trees. 18 In the Project Browser. View the roof. for Type. click Lines. 16 Click Apply. under Floor Plans. double-click {3D}. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. click (Default 3D View). 14 In the Name dialog.5 Meters. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and in the Type Selector. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK twice. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 2400 mm.

enter 0 mm. and click to sketch a line. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 26 On the Options Bar. and click to sketch a line. 25 Using the same method. and click to place the line. click (Draw). 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. 29 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B.

35 Select the line that you just drew. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. move the cursor up 900 mm. click (Trim/Extend). 32 Press ESC. and click to finish the line. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B.30 On the Options Bar. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. and click to finish the line. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 34 On the Tools toolbar. clear Chain. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. and click so he is facing the column. 48 In the Type Selector. near Column E5. as shown: (Element Properties). 43 Click OK twice. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. enter Sidewalk. click Duplicate. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 49 On the Options Bar. enter -250 mm. 42 In the Name dialog. Next. When you render an image. under Constraints. In plan view. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. The completed sidewalk displays. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. for Type. 45 Click OK. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. select Rotate after placement. 39 Select the sidewalk. click Component. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. for Height Offset from Level. a photorealistic image displays. select M_RPC Male : Alex. 40 In the Element Properties dialog.38 On the Design Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog.

you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. about 30 degrees.NOTE If necessary. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). click Camera. and click to place her on the sidewalk. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select M_RPC Beetle. 56 Press ESC twice. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. click the car. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. and click (Element Properties). 54 In the Type Selector. 52 In the Type Selector. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. and place it along the sidewalk behind him.

Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy.59 In the Element Properties dialog. for Offset. under 3D Views. If the sidewalk changes height. double-click West. click Pick Host. 60 In the Project Browser. 63 Click the sidewalk. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. under Elevations. double-click To Building. and on the Options Bar. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. and on the Options Bar. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. enter -300 mm. 66 Using the same method. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. 65 Click the sidewalk. When you select a host for a component. and click OK. 64 Select Alex. Next. under Constraints. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. click Pick Host. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 .

After the service core is positioned. and replace them with a service core. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. 68 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group.

walls. 3 Select the entire stairwell. click 6 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and shaft opening.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . (SteeringWheels). you delete the entire stairwell. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View). and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core.rvt. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. including the stairs. under Floor Plans. 4 Press DELETE. 5 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building.

14 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and zoom in to the linked instance. expand Groups.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. expand Model. click (Align). 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. under Floor Plans. and notice that the linked file is listed. right-click m_RRB_core. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. 13 In the drawing area. click Modify. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. 11 In the Project Browser.rvt. click OK. and on the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click Create Instance. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. 10 In the Project Browser. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. double-click 00 Foundation.

20 On the View toolbar. click 21 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ Click grid line C. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. click Modify. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. 19 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the core. click Modify. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. and on the Options Bar. (SteeringWheels). Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. and click to align the center. click Ungroup. or if the group layout is expected to change. (Default 3D View). click (top down view).

click Training Files. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 22 Proceed to the final exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. where it is hosted within a railing family. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building.rvt. you add glass railings around the floor edges. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. After you modify it.

under Floor Plans. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. expand Families. and on the Options Bar. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. and select Glass. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. click Edit. click OK. and expand Railings. double-click 02 Level. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. expand Renderings. and open Metric\m_Conference. 13 On the Tools toolbar. Handrail only. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 .rvt. and double-click Lounge Perspective. 5 Expand Railing. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. and Parapet. press and hold CTRL. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. The rendering displays. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click to split the floor. 8 In the Project Browser. The floor sketch displays. in the Project Browser. click Training Files.rvt. 3 In the Conference project.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click (Split). Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor.

17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. click Modify. and click to place it. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. 24 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. and on the Options Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. click (Align). and click to draw another line. and click to draw another line. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it.15 On the Design Bar. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. verify that Chain is not selected. 25 Select grid line B. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B.

35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 100 mm. click Dimension. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. click Finish Sketch. select Glass. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. 33 On the Design Bar. click Railing Properties. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 30 On the Design Bar.26 Select grid line D. For Offset.rvt project. and lock the alignment. 27 On the Tools toolbar. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 31 In the Revit dialog. click (Align). click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Railing. 29 On the Design Bar. Lock the dimensions. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . for Type.

39 Click Finish Sketch. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. click Dimension. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. click Camera.37 On the Design Bar.

42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. You can view the railing that you just added. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 .

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

and a roof garden. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. lofty ceilings. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. NOTE For training purposes. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. slight modifications to the building design have been made. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. 153 . the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. exterior fire stairs. balconies.

154 .

and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. 155 . section.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. how to create section and elevation views. elevation. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. including plan. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. you learn how to create views from a building model. You learn how to create new views from existing views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.

rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. expand Floor Plans. click Training Files. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser.

select Level 2. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan.2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 8 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 3 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . and click OK. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 9 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Project Browser.

double-click Vicinity Plan.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 12 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Next. enter Vicinity Plan. and click OK. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. 13 In the Project Browser. and click 1: 1000. click the current scale. 14 On the View Control Bar. 11 Under Floor Plans.

and click Hide in view ➤ Category. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 16 Right-click. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. select 1:100. double-click Level 1. for Scale. click Elevation. select Elevation: Building Elevation. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

click Modify. click Modify. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 .Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar.

select Section: Building Section. under Elevations (Building Elevation).Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Rename View dialog. under Views (all). 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. enter South East. expand Floor Plans. double-click South East. and double-click Level 1. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select 1:100. ■ Move the cursor down. for Scale. 14 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Section. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 11 In the Project Browser. under Elevations.

Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 .

164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. and click to place it. click Split Segment. Click the midpoint of the section line.

and double-click Section 1. using the blue circular drag grip. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.21 On the Design Bar. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. click Modify. 24 Select gridline F. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . expand Sections (Building Section). 23 On the View Control Bar. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. To create each view. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.

rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. select Floor Plan.Resulting callout view . select 1:50. click Callout. 3 In the Type Selector. for Scale. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. Creating Callout Views | 167 .Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

■ Select the middle grip. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and select the callout boundary. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. click Modify.

right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. select 1:50. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. click Modify.7 On the Design Bar. Creating Callout Views | 169 . Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click Section 1. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. under Sections (Building Sections). click Callout. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 9 In the Rename View dialog. 13 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select Detail View: Detail. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building.

16 Modify the callout leader as shown.■ Move the cursor diagonally down. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

under Detail Views (Details). Creating Callout Views | 171 . double-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK.17 In the Project Browser. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Detail Views (Details). 18 In the Rename View dialog. enter Roof Overhang Detail. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser.

172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rfa. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. select Custom-Section Head. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. open Metric\Families\Annotations.rvt. under Floor Plans. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. You change the appearance of the section mark head. and click Open. click Training Files. the elevation markers. double-click Level 1. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.

clear any others. and click OK. select the section line. and click OK twice. 22 In the Name dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . 9 In the Type Properties dialog.Filled. and select 3. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.5mm Square. 15 Under Category. click Duplicate. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. enter Section Head – Custom. and click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Section Tail . for Section Head. scroll to Section Line. . 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. scroll to Section Marks. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. select Section Head . and can be applied to the section line. click Load into Project. enter 12. On the floor plan. 10 On the floor plan. and select 2. Section Tail – Filled. and click OK. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 17 Under Category.Custom. click Duplicate.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 12 For Section Tag. select the current project. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Edit/New. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 Click OK.

open Metric\Families\Annotations. select Square. select the callout. For Corner Radius. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. . 40 Press ESC. For Dimensions ➤ Width. click Duplicate.5mm Square. click Edit/New. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 39 Click OK twice. 27 Click OK twice. select Custom-Callout Head. notice the square elevation markers that display. 30 On the Design Bar. enter 6 mm. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. click Edit/New. 36 In the drawing. and on the Options Bar. for Callout Tag.5 mm. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the current project.23 In the Type Properties dialog. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 34 In the Name dialog.rfa. select 3. enter 12. select 12. and on the Options Bar. for Elevation Tag. click Load into Project. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. Click OK. On the floor plan. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. For Line Weight. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. and click Open. clear all others. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. . The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. Click OK. click Training Files. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open.

expand Callout Boundary. and select 7. 46 Under Category. click the Annotation Objects tab. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. filters. scroll down to Callout Boundary. and visual overrides. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . masking regions. 45 For Line Pattern. and select 4. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. You learn to create view templates. 47 Select Callout Leader Line.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 49 Click OK. select Dash. 43 Under Category. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. view regions. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.

click (Show Crop Region). 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings.Creating a View Template In this exercise. under Elevations. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 6 On the View Toolbar. 2 On the View Control Bar. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. click (Hide Crop Region). and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. click Training Files. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and apply it to multiple elevation views. To accomplish this. click Zoom to Fit.rvt. and double-click East. The crop region displays as red. 5 On the View Control Bar.

Callouts. Creating a View Template | 177 . 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and section lines are now hidden in the view. levels.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. 11 Under Visibility. elevation markers. grids. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. clear Entourage. under Visibility. 13 On the View Control bar.

edit the crop region as before. 20 Using the same method. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. click OK. under Elevations. and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Apply. right-click North. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. 15 In the New View Template dialog. double-click North. and click Create View Template From View. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 16 In the View Templates dialog.14 In the Project Browser. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. right-click East. and click Apply View Template. under Elevations. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 17 In the Project Browser.

under Floor Plans.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. under Extents. click Edit. for Bottom. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Level Below (Level 4). 2 In the Project Browser. Under View Depth. select Penthouse. and click Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. for View Range. double-click Penthouse. Click OK twice. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. select Level Below (Level 4). for Level. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan.

Click OK twice. under Extents. 6 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. select Level 4. for View Range. Under View Depth. select Roof Plan.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. select Level 4. for Bottom. double-click Roof Plan. click Edit. right-click. for Level. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

select Unlimited. under Extents. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . 10 On the Design Bar. Move you cursor diagonally. Click OK twice. In the left corner of the building. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. select Unlimited. click Plan Region. Under View Depth. 11 On the Options Bar. click Region Properties. for Level. for Bottom. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). 16 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. for View Range.

click the Filters tab. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise.17 On the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. in this case. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill.rvt. click Modify. the fire rating of the walls. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. After you apply the filter. expand Floor Plans. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Views (all).

and click OK. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. for Pattern. 16 Click OK. under Categories. click Add. enter Rated Walls. for Rated Walls. for Color. select Solid Fill. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Override under Patterns. and apply a color. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. 5 In the Filters dialog. 10 On the Filter tab. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. click Edit/New. click Remove. click OK. under Basic colors. under Filters. click (New). Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . 12 On the Filter tab. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click OK. select Walls. 14 In the Color dialog. select Fire Rating. 9 Click OK. 11 Select Rated Walls.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 7 In the Filters dialog. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. under Projection/Surface. click <No Override>. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 17 Using the same method. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. and click OK. Enter Hr. select the red color. and click OK. Select contains.

you obscure geometry in portions of a view. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. To accomplish this. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 4 On the View Control Bar. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 8 Select the crop region. under Floor Plans. 9 On the View Control Bar. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 7 On the View menu. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 11 In the Type Selector. select Invisible lines.rvt. click Masking Region. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. right-click. and click OK. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. as shown. 5 On the View menu. click Show Crop Region.

186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Finish Sketch.12 On the Options Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Rectangle).

enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click in the Patterns field. click <No Override> to apply a color. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click OK. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. right-click. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click 1: 50. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. 11 Click OK twice. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. under Floor Plans. click the current scale. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 7 Under Cut. for Pattern. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Visibility. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . click black. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click Rename.Level 1. right-click Unit 18 Plan . for Color. and click Override. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. right-click. 4 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. under Pattern Overrides. select Walls. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select Solid fill. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects.

clear Floors. and click OK. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear Grids. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. 16 Under Visibility. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. under Visibility. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown.

Working with Visual Overrides | 189 . 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.18 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Category.

25 Click OK twice. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. click a purple color. By using the previous method to make the selection. select the sofa.20 Right-click. 23 In the Color dialog. right-click. and click OK. click <No Override> to apply a color. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Pattern. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. select Dash. for Color. click Projection Lines. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. under Lines. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. click Override. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 21 Under Projection/Surface. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.

click . 29 In the Color dialog.28 For Color. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click By Category Override. select a bright green color. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . and click OK twice. 30 On the Design Bar. 32 Select one of the lamps. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. right-click.

34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.33 On the View Control Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . how to add views to the sheets. click . you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. select A0 metric.Creating Sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. click Training Files. right-click. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. and click OK.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Sheet. and click View.rvt. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar.

Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. enter A101. click Modify. expand Sheets (all). enter Site Plan. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . 7 On the Design Bar. 5 When the title block highlights.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved.Unnamed. on the Options Bar. Click OK. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. For Sheet Name. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser. and select the title block. click Modify. For Sheet Number.

For Project Number. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. For Client Name. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Smith. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . 14 Click OK. For Project Name. MA 12345 12 Click OK. click Edit. enter 2009-1. The new project information displays in the titleblock. for Project Address. under Other. enter 15 May. For Project Status. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 11 In the Edit Text dialog.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. enter For Approval. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter J. 2009. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family.

you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Elevations A106 . create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select the new sheet name. and click Rename.Elevations A107 . and click OK. and click OK. you add views to these sheets. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Layout Plan A104 . and click Save. select A0 metric. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.rvt. 17 In the Project Browser. right-click. for Name.Sections A108 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. enter Floor Plan. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.Elevations A105 .Stairs In the following exercise.

Floor Plan. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. 4 On the Design Bar. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. select Level 1. double-click A102 . under Elevations (Building Elevation).rvt. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. and drag it to the sheet.Elevations. under Floor Plans. under Sheets (all). and click to place the view. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. double-click A104 . 6 In the Project Browser. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . under Sheets (all). and click to place it. The red border around the view no longer displays.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. click Modify.

8 On the Design Bar. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections).7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 12 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. click Modify. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. double-click A107 . align it with the East elevation. and click to place it. and click to place it. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). under Sheets (all). drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet.Sections.

Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. and press TAB until it highlights. and on the Options Bar. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. for View Scale. and click OK. zoom in to the grip. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . select 1:5. . Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. 16 Select title bar. move the cursor over it.

19 On the Design Bar. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 21 Zoom to the stair callout. under Sheets (all).Stairs. 18 Under Floor Plans. double-click A108 . click Modify. under Floor Plans. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. and click to place it. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers.

you must first activate the view on the sheet. double-click A107 .rvt. and press ENTER. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and then make changes and deactivate the view. enter 16700 mm. under Sheets (all). and click Activate View.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level.Sections. In order to do this. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 On the Design Bar. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. right-click. 2 Select the building section view.

7 In the Project Browser. You modify the view to hide the view title. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .6 Right-click. and click Deactivate View. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click North. After you create the sheet.rvt. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. you create a title sheet for your drawing set.

Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. 7 Place the camera as shown. enter Title Sheet. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. enter T. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . The camera view displays. For Sheet Name. double-click Level 1. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. select the new sheet name. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select A0 metric. click Camera. right-click. and click Properties. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser.

select Far Clip Active. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. 11 On the View Control Bar. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 13 In the Project Browser. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter 18000 mm. Under Extents. Under Camera. and click to place it in the center of the sheet.Title Sheet.8 On the Options Bar. enter 100000 mm. For Target Elevation. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click T . 14 Under 3D Views. For Far Clip Offset. 12 On the View Control Bar. under Sheets (all). click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. for Eye Elevation. enter 1500 mm. Click OK.

The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. for Show title. select No. enter 635 mm. click Modify. select Scale (locked proportions). click Size. and then click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify.15 With the view selected. Click Apply. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. click Duplicate. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . 22 In the Name dialog. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Under Model Crop Size. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. for Height. enter Viewport/no title mark. click Edit/New. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. under Graphics. on the Options Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. . 25 On the Design Bar. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Select the view on the sheet. 24 Click OK twice.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Level 1.rvt. 207 . you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. You also learn to create different types of schedules. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Tagging Objects In this lesson. such as doors and windows. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. click Training Files. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . expand Floor Plans. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. such as room and window schedules. Because of the open style floor plan.

and click Room and Area. right-click in the Design Bar. as shown: 5 Using the same method. move the cursor to the right. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Room Separation.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right.

click Load. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. 9 In the Tags dialog. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar.6 Using the same method. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 .

click Room. 16 On the Design Bar. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . indicating that it can be edited. 14 For Offset. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. The room tag number displays in blue. click OK. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. verify that Tag on placement is selected. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. click Modify.rfa. type 2400 mm. and press ENTER. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. and click to place the room and tag. click Training Files. click it. and select the room tag. 11 In the Tags dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. type U18-1.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.

NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Sequential letters are also supported. 22 Click the room text label. and press ENTER. type Entry. place rooms and tags. 23 Using the same method. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 .18 Click the room text label. click Modify. Dining. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. type Kitchen. Click to place the new room and tag. click Modify. and press ENTER. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. click Room. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar.

28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). expand Lines. under Floor Plans. and click OK. click Modify. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. click Room Tag. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. The rooms are already placed.Level 2. on the Model Categories tab. but they need to be tagged.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Room Separation. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. double-click Unit 18 Plan . and moving clockwise. 27 On the Design Bar. 29 On the Design Bar.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt.Level 1. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . in the Project Browser. clear Leader. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt. expand Floor Plans.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to place door and window tags. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

and press ENTER. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . select Corridor. type Building Entry. The room Number is U17-46. next to Rows. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. type Storage. 101-106. 10 Edit the number to be 101.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. select Storage. 11 Using the same method. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. For 104. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. for Name. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. add 5 more rooms. For 105. For 103. For 102. type Corridor. and press ENTER. for room 101. click New.

For Room Separation. click the Color field.■ For 106. For Weight.rvt. click the Lines field. 4 Click OK twice. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. under Projection/Surface. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type Stair. 13 Save the file. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. In the Line Graphics dialog. select 9. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Lines. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. Under Custom colors. you add room separation lines. place rooms from a program list. and press ENTER. and click OK. under Floor Plans. under Visibility. click Override. In the Lines field. and modify room names. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Level 1. click the bright green swatch.

click Room. click Modify. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. click Room Separation. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. First.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. draw the horizontal line. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar.

11 On the Options Bar. 14 For Offset. type 2400 mm. for Room. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). select 101 Building Entry. for Room.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. select 102 Storage. 13 On the Options Bar. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

and zoom in to the Corridor.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. 16 Using the same method. 17 On the Design Bar. double-click Room Schedule. 20 While pressing CTRL. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. under Floor Plans. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. place the following rooms. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. double-click Level 1. under Schedules/Quantities. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 19 In the Project Browser. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas).

click Schedule/Quantities. (Element Properties). under Category. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 On the Options Bar. clear Room Bounding. click 23 On the Design Bar.21 On the Options Bar. click Modify. and Wall Finish. and click OK. while pressing CTRL. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 31 For Key Name. and for all 3 finishes. type Units. and click Add. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. type As Selected. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click New. 27 Select Schedule keys. under Available fields. for Rows. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. under Constraints. select Base Finish. 24 Open the Room Schedule. select Rooms. and click OK. Floor Finish.

45 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. select Rooms. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. click (Element Properties). click (Filter Selection). 36 Click OK twice. under Schedules/Quantities. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. select Room Style. under Floor Plans. 38 Under U17-8. for Available fields. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Units. right-click Room Schedule. for Fields. 37 Open the Room Schedule. under Identity Data. and click Add. select Units. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 .32 Using the same method. for Room Style. click Check None. 42 On the Options Bar. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser. click Edit. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 43 In the Filter dialog. for Room Style. and click Properties. double-click Level 1. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. and click OK. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. 44 On the Options Bar.

and 106. under Graphics. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.46 Open the Room Schedule. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and apply it to the Level 1 view. click 5 For Title. select Room Style. 48 Save the file. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). for Name. at the warning prompt. type Room Type. type Room Type. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. select Public. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. (Duplicate). right-click Level 1.rvt. click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. 103. select Service. 9 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. for Color. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. For rooms 102 and 105. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. and double-click Level 1. under Views (all). click the Color Scheme field. expand Floor Plans. 104. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click OK. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1.

select Room Type. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. click the value in the Color column. and click OK. and clear Room Separation. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. click Edit. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . expand Lines. clear Visible. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select the color legend. click Color Scheme Legend. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. under Schemes. under Visibility. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. click Edit Color Scheme. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). 19 On the Options Bar.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 14 Click OK twice. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

29 Click OK twice. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. and click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. type 5 mm. on the Options Bar. for Swatch Width. (Element Properties). 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Graphics. 23 Using the same method. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. under Custom color. respectively. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray.22 In the Color dialog. for Size. 24 Click OK. 28 Under Title Text. type 25 mm. select blue. click Edit/New.

select Room Type. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rooms. click Color Scheme Legend. double-click Building Section. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Sections. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . As you move the cursor over the drawing area. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. under Sections. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. and click OK. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. 35 Click OK twice. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. under Visibility. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. under Graphics. right-click Building Section.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. click Edit. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and select Properties. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. for Color Scheme.

47 In the Element Properties dialog. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. select Units. (Filter Selection). for Room Style. 46 Click . and click OK. 41 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select all the rooms in the stairwell.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. select Public. 42 In the Filter dialog. select Rooms. and click OK. 45 While pressing CTRL. under Identity Data. for Room Style. click . 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 44 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. click Check None.

double-click Room Style Schedule. and click . click New. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. type Suites. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . for Rows. excluding the stairwell spaces. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. select Service. under Identity Data. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. for Room Style. 51 On the Options Bar. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. 54 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. under Key Name for the new row. under Schedules/Quantities.

A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. The color fill will extend to the roof. under Identity Data. under Volume Computations. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. 59 Under Room Area Computation. The color fill extends to the roof. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. but not beyond it. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. verify that At wall finish is selected. and click OK. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. select Suites. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. and click OK.55 Click . select the room on the left side of the top floor. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. for Room Style. select Areas and Volumes.

select the stairwell room.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. 71 Click OK. . select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). and click 65 For Limit Offset. and the living room. 67 On the first level. type 0. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. 66 Click OK. under Constraints. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. for Upper Limit. type -254 mm. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . select Level 2.0. 68 Click . click Modify. the dining room. 72 On the Design Bar. select Loft. 70 For Limit Offset. for Upper Limit.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.rvt. under 3D Views. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. double-click {3D}. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.73 Save the file.

Clear Itemize every instance.EPDM.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. and click OK. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . click Family and Type. click Modify.Insulation on Plywood Deck . select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . select Roofs. under Available fields. under Category. 5 On the Design Bar. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 9 Using the same method. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. Select Grand totals. 3 While pressing CTRL. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. For Then by. select Material: Description. 4 In the Type Selector. and click Add. select Family and Type. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.

80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type Estimated Cost. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. 20 For Formula. click Edit. 17 Click Calculated Value. 12 Click OK. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. for Name. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 23 For Field formatting. and click Properties. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. select Material: Cost. for Fields. under Other. for Material: Cost. select Calculate totals. and click Add. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). and under Fields. select Calculate totals. click the Formatting tab. Under Field formatting. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. under Available fields.40 50. click Estimated Cost. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. 21 Click OK. select Currency. and click OK twice. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. 19 For Type. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Material: Area.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields.

In this lesson.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. creating a generic tag to tag the family. you create an exiting plan for the building. 28 For Unit symbol. either within family components or within the project template. The cost fields are formatted correctly. and are defined and stored in an external file. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. not just for currency. regardless of category. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. 30 Click OK twice. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . for Currency. 31 Save the file. tag the line. 29 Select Use digit grouping. and schedule the total distance of each path. adding the shared parameters to a family. and reporting the shared parameters. 26 In the Project Units dialog. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. can be used for any number-based parameter. you create a shared parameter file. for Rounding. You draw a travel path line. 27 In the Format dialog.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. ensuring consistency across families and projects. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. which inserts commas after every three digits. select $. Digit grouping. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. These shared parameters can be added to any family. click the Format value.

NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Create. select Length. type Path ID. for Name. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog.rvt. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for File name. 11 Click OK twice. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Name. under Groups.txt. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. click Training Files. for Type of Parameter. and click OK. 7 Under Parameters. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click New. under Floor Plans. click New. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. type OfficeStandardsParameters. and click OK. type Travel Distance. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. type Exiting. and click Save. click New. for Name. 9 Under Parameters.

select Shared parameter. for Group parameter under. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 11 Click OK. 10 Using the same method.rvt. and click Select. 15 If necessary. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. and click OK.rfa. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. type Length. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click OK. under Dimensions. under Parameter Type. Click Training Files. 13 Click Apply. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. group it under Dimensions. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Load into Projects. 12 In the Family Types dialog.rvt. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. select Constraints.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 4 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameters. click Family Types. and click OK. and select Instance. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameter Data. 14 On the Design Bar. 8 Select Instance. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. If you have multiple projects open. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. in the Load into Projects dialog. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Add. and click OK. for Travel Distance Formula. following the equals symbol (=). 3 On the Design Bar. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. under Parameters. click Add. otherwise the family loads into the current project.

17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . (Add 26 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. click Training Files. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. under Category Parameters. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. select Travel Distance.rft. select Travel Distance. 24 Click OK twice. 19 On the Design Bar. click (Add Parameter). click Select. click Label. click Label. and click OK. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click parameter(s) to label). and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

35 Save the file. for File Name. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. and click Save. and press DELETE. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . 32 In the Save As dialog. type M_Travel Distance Tag. and move it down. click Modify. 33 On the Design Bar. 29 In the drawing window. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. and click OK.rfa.rvt is selected. click Load into Projects. select Path ID.28 On the Design Bar.

254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click Exiting Plan . and click in the center of the corridor. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 6 Move the cursor to the right. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. above the exterior door as shown. After the lines are tagged.rvt.Tagging.Placing. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans.Level 1. click Component. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. select Chain. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar.

and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . verify that Chain is selected. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines.7 Move the cursor down.Level 2. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 While pressing CTRL. Placing. click Tag ➤ By Category. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. under Floor Plans. double click Exiting Plan . click Modify.Tagging. 10 On the Options Bar. and click outside of the building. type 1-1. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. through the door. and click (Element Properties). click Component. under Constraints. for Path ID. move the cursor near the right corner. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Leader. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar.

and click in the stair. and click above the door to the stair. click Modify.19 Move the cursor up through the door. 23 Move the cursor down. click Component. and click. move the cursor to the left. 21 On the Design Bar. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 20 On the Design Bar. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path.

and click OK. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Category. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . click Modify. 28 While pressing CTRL. under Constraints. 27 On the Design Bar. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. type Level 1 Exit Distance. 30 Using the same method. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. . for Path ID. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog.Tagging. and click OK. Placing. click Modify. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. type 2-1.24 On the Design Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. 33 For Name. 32 In the New Schedule dialog.

The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. and click Rename. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 36 For Filter by. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. select Calculate totals. select Path ID. 41 Under Fields. in the first field. under Other. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. for Filter.rvt. 43 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. while pressing CTRL. 42 Click OK. in the second field. under Available fields. click Edit. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. under Schedules/Quantities. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. 44 In the Project Browser. type 1-. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. select contains. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. type Level 2 Exit Distance. in the third field. select Path ID and Travel Distance. select Travel Distance. 38 For Sort by. 50 Save the file. 40 Click the Formatting tab. 49 Click OK twice. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. and under Field formatting. and in the third field. 46 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select Path ID.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. 35 Click the Filter tab. type 2-. and click Properties. and click Add. 45 In the Rename View dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click OK. for Filter by.

under Identity Data. and click Properties. 4 Under Available fields. click the Value field.Fixed Partitions. select the following fields. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. select Walls. right-click Generic . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. under Categories. expand C .152 mm. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click . 10 In the schedule. for Assembly Code.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. and select C1010145 . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . and click View.Interiors ➤ C10 . click the Fields tab.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. right-click the Design Bar. and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.Partitions .Partitions ➤ C1010100 . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. 9 Click OK twice.

12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. and click Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. for Database Name. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. click Training Files.mdb. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. click the File Data Source tab. under Database. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. and click OK to create the database. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 6 Click Finish. 1 On the File menu. and click Next. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. the database display may be different than that shown. 3 Click New. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 8 In the New Database dialog. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. select a location for the database file. 11 Click OK 3 times. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 9 Under Directories. click Create.mdb). click OK.11 Close the exercise file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. type Revit_Project.rvt.

Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . Additionally. For example. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. in addition to the Id column. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. 13 Close the exercise file. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables.

262 .

Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. 263 . or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

297 . The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. These components display at the required scale. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you trace over the building model geometry. plywood. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. In order to detail from the building model. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. and metal studs. add detail components. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. In the callout view. like a standard door header condition.

for Graphics ➤ Display Model. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as well as detail lines. 5 In the alert dialog. you detail the view of the roof edge. Exact location is not important. 7 In the drawing area. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and insulation objects. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. click Training Files. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. click Training Files. You load detail components. region objects. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. They are also view specific. After you add components. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. click Detail Component.rvt. select As underlay. The roof overhang detail displays. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click Open.rfa. double-click the detail callout head. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. which means that all detail components.Detailing the View In this exercise. and click OK. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects.

click (Element Properties). 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. click Duplicate. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.8 Delete the component. 17 In the drawing area. enter 406. Detailing the View | 299 . 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click Edit/New. 16 Click OK twice. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 15 For Spacing. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents.5mm. and click OK. select Corrugated Metal. click Repeating Detail. 13 In the Name dialog. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 14 In the Type Properties dialog.

verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. click Detail Component. and click Open. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 22 On the Options Bar. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and on the Edit toolbar. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 24 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. click (Move). Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. click Load.rfa. click Training Files.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. ■ ■ Click Modify.

30 In the Type Selector. Detailing the View | 301 . click Detail Component. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. click OK. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 33 In the Type Selector.Because you still have several components to load. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. 29 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. and place it in the detail view as shown.rvt. you load them as a group from a single file. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 31 To properly orient the component. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. press SPACEBAR 3 times. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components.

The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. click the Flip instance arrows. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 37 Click Modify. 38 Select the horizontal segment. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 35 On the Options Bar. select Chain. and click Modify. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm.

and on the Edit toolbar. 42 Click Modify. as shown.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. ■ Click Modify. Detailing the View | 303 . 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. For Offset. click (Move). 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. click Insulation. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. select to near side. enter 140mm. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point.

3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component.45 In the Type Selector. and lock the component. you add lines to your detail. 47 In the Type Selector. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. meaning they display only in this view. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. 2 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. they are view specific. select Thin Lines. Like detail components. click Detail Lines. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 51 Click Modify. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. as shown. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown.

drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. as shown. For Offset. 7 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 11 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. enter 10mm. and press ENTER.4 Click Modify. select Medium Lines. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. 10 On the Design Bar. enter 10mm. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. For Offset. as shown. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines.

select Chain. click (Draw).Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. and draw the detail lines as shown. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and clear Chain. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component.

and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 26 In the Type Selector. 22 In the Project Browser. When you turn the display model off. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. click Detail Lines.18 In the Type Selector. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. select Thin Lines. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. select Do not display. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. select the Penthouse level line. enter 10mm. 24 On the View Control Bar. Click (Pick Lines). draw the detail lines as shown. and click Properties. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. select Vapor Barrier. For Offset. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. and press ENTER. right-click.

Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 32 Click Modify. you add text notes to complete the detail. press SPACEBAR as necessary. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. 30 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. select M_Break Line. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Text Notes on page 308. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail.29 On the Design Bar.

click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 2 On the Options Bar. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Enter the text. click Dimension. click Text. and click to place the dimension. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. Click again to specify the location of the text box. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click Modify. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar.rvt. Adding Text Notes | 309 .

you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. under Text Fields. right-click. and click Rename. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. and click the dimension text.rvt. right-click. select a text note. and click OK. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and press DELETE. (Filter Selection). click Select All Instances. click 6 In the Filter dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. enter Roof Overhang Detail . Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter Typ. for Suffix. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.7 Select the dimension line. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Creating Detail Components on page 310. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. and click OK. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. on the Options Bar. click Roof Overhang Detail. and save the exercise file. right-click. and click OK.Keynotes. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.

16 Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. select all the coping linework. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.7 Click Modify. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. select Medium Lines. 14 Click Modify. in the Type Selector. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. and selecting the chain. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. while pressing CTRL. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click Open. pressing TAB.rft. 15 Use a window to select all linework. click Training Files. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. Creating Detail Components | 311 . 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog.

click Detail Component. click Load. and the component can be placed in the detail. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 23 Using a window. 30 In the drawing area. click Detail Component. 22 Click Modify.rfa. and click Open. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. enter Roof Edge. delete the underlying linework. select the coping. 25 In the Filter dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 31 Using the same method used previously. 26 Press DELETE. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . and click Save. double-click it in the Project Browser. 21 To place the component.Keynotes view is not the open view. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK.18 In the Save As dialog. you place keynotes on objects. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Keynotes on page 312. navigate to your preferred location. click . and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. clear Detail Items. click Training Files. for File name. The original linework remains selected. 28 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. While pressing SHIFT. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 27 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail.

2 In the alert dialog. use keynote 06160. select the metal fascia with drip edge. For the metal coping. Roof Edge4. In the Keynotes dialog. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. Adding Keynotes | 313 . select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. and click OK. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rvt. click Keynote ➤ Element. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. (Element Properties). navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. click Training Files. Click to place the leader arm.rfa. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. 63mm Rigid Insulation.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 19mm Plywood. and click Open. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.B5. 6 Click Modify.D11. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog.C1. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. click Edit/New. use keynote 07645.

Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.F1. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. use keynote 06160.F1.20 Ga. For the 50 x 200.A8. 22mm Corrugated Steel .D1. For the 50 x 300. click Keynote ➤ Element. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. FasciaProfile_1. select Corrugated Metal. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. use keynote 06110. navigate to 07645. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. use keynote 06110.G1. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. 11 Click OK 3 times.I1. using keynote 07460. click Detail Component. use keynote 06110.9 In the Type Properties dialog. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. and click . For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. You do this in order to keynote the component. 18 Save the file. 12 On the Design Bar. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. For the 50 x 150. use keynote 09250. 15 In the Type Selector.D11. 17 Keynote the component. click in the Value column. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Load into Projects. 9 On the Design Bar. select the left end point of the reference line. and click Modify. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click Save. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. click Detail Component. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click Open.rft. 4 In the Type Selector. 13 In the Type Selector. 11 Press DELETE. select Medium Line Detail Component. and click Open. and m_Light Line Detail Component. 5 In the drawing area. click Training Files. navigate to your preferred location. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. select Medium Lines. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. for File name. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 19 In the Name dialog. 16 Select the component.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Lines. click Detail Component. 24 While pressing CTRL. 20 Click OK 3 times. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 6 Lock the line. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. click Edit/New. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click Load. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 22 On the Options Bar. 15 Click Modify. and select the right end point. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. click Duplicate. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click (Element Properties).rvt. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components.

48 Using the same method used previously. click in the Value column. 44 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing .A5. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 40 Click Modify. 29 In the drawing area. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 27 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. and hidden) used in the view. click (Move). and click the lower end at the break line. 31 Select the component. and click . 41 Select the component just added. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 37 Click OK 3 times. and click . against the 19mm plywood. name the component Air Barrier. 38 On the Design Bar. 42 Using the same method used previously. 34 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. click Detail Component. 28 In the Type Selector. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 49 With the component selected. and assign it keynote 06110. 46 Click Modify. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. and click . 43 Zoom to the repeating component. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. and click . and assign it keynote 07260. on the Edit toolbar. 30 Click Modify. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530.G1. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. and click OK. You add the components to the project and keynote them. invisible. click Detail Component. 47 Select the component.A1.25 Next. click Detail Component. enter EPDM Membrane.

click Detail Component. select Chain. 52 In the Type Selector. leaving the detail component lines. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 53 On the Options Bar. 55 Click Modify. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 .Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. and click . 57 Select the vertical hidden line component.

select Invisible Lines. 68 In the drawing area. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. name the component Vapor Barrier. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 61 In the drawing area. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.rfa. 60 On the Design Bar. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. Air Barrier. 67 In the Type Selector.58 Using the method used previously. in the Type Selector. click Detail Component. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Keynote ➤ Element. 63 In the drawing area. click Load into Projects. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.A4. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 50 x 200 Framing. and Vapor Barrier. and assign it keynote 07260. select the component.

txt. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. name the component Batt Insul. and assign it keynote 07210. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Keynote Table. click Browse. Enter 07463. The database file opens in a text editor. and press ENTER. and close the text editor.69 Select the component.A9. 71 In the drawing area. and click . navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. 73 Proceed to the next exercise..rvt. and press TAB. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. click File menu ➤ Save. 72 Save the file.A4. 70 Using the method used previously.A1. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Enter 07460. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. and press TAB. add a keynote for the component. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. 3 In the text editor.

you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. 14 Save the file.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. 13 Click Modify. In the Type Selector. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. you learn how to create a drafted detail. After you create a drafting view. 11 Click Modify. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. under Path Type. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. select all the keynotes. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. navigate to 07463. click to place the leader. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. and click OK. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. and click Open. and click to place the note. click Keynote ➤ Element. and click OK. Each keynote displays as a simple number. 9 In the drawing area. select Absolute. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. These details do not update with changes to the building model.A1. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number.txt.

For Colors. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . and click Rename. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 7 In the Rename View dialog.dwg. for Scale. click Training Files. select Black and White.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. The detail that you import is in DWG format. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail.rvt. Click Open.Center to Center is selected. verify that Auto . right-click Drafting 1. For Positioning. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise.rvt. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. select 1 : 5. enter EPDM Metal Coping. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. and click OK. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. 6 In the Project Browser.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. click Edit/New.No Reference. 12 Click OK twice. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. for New.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. click Rename. enter Detail . 5 Click Modify. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the callout. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Callout. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 10 In the Rename dialog. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. and click Properties. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 3 On the Options Bar. select Reference other view. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. delete the existing value.

Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar.No Reference). you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . double-click A105 . There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . The callout is updated with the sheet information. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. and double-click the callout. 18 Save the file. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail./Sect. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise./Det. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). click Modify. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser.Elev.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. Board. for Name. select Gypsum-Plaster. and click OK. click Filled Region.rvt. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. . 14 Click OK 3 times. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. click Edit/New. enter Header @ Sliding Door. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 3 On the View Control Bar. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. enter Gyp. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 11 In the Name dialog. for Name. click Region Properties. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 5 In the Type Selector. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. click Duplicate. and click OK.

select the width dimension.5mm. and on the Edit toolbar. click 22 On the Options Bar.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. select Wide Lines. and enter 20. click Finish Sketch. click . 20 On the Design Bar. 17 Click Modify. 16 Select the left edge of the region. select the left and bottom edges of the region. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. 19 In the Type Selector. Draw a rectangle as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . 18 While pressing CTRL. click (Draw). (Mirror).

Finish. 33 Click OK 3 times. 24 Select the mirrored region. Move the cursor up. enter Wood . 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Properties dialog.Finish. for Name. click Region Properties. 25 Click Modify. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. click Filled Region. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Name dialog. select Wood . 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. click Duplicate. and click above the top of the region as the end point. and click OK. click Edit/New. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

select Medium Lines. sketch the new region as shown. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. 38 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. click (Align). Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. select Medium Lines.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. and select the right edge of the wood region. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. click (Rectangle). 39 In the Type Selector. click Filled Region. click . Draw a rectangle as shown. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch.5mm. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . verify that the thickness is 19mm.

328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 47 Click the reference plane. and press ENTER. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Tools toolbar. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar.42 On the Design Bar. enter 6mm. enter 10mm. (Align). click 48 Click Modify. For Offset. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. click Filled Region. click Ref Plane. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Finish Sketch. and press ENTER. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset.

53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. enter 0. Select Chain. click (Trim/Extend). and click to select the point. Move the cursor down 305mm. 56 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor left 25mm. Move the cursor right 25mm. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). For Offset. and click to select the point. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . 54 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch. and click to select the point. and press ENTER. and select the bottom horizontal line.

click Training Files. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. click Load. For Offset. enter 3mm. and press ENTER. and click Open. 68 Click Modify. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. top. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. select the height dimension.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 62 Select the left detail line. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 76. and right edges of the door panel region. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and press ENTER. select Medium Lines. 58 In the Type Selector.rfa. 69 Select the bolt. 60 Select the left. 65 On the Options Bar.2mm. 61 Click Modify. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. click Detail Lines.

click Training Files.70 On the Design Bar. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 76 In the Type Selector. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. and click Open. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. 74 Select the expansion bolt. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. click Detail Lines.rfa. select Wide Lines. 71 On the Options Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. click Load. use the images as a guide.

(Mirror). 87 Click Modify. 84 On the Design Bar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click . click Detail Lines. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 82 Select the rectangle. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 85 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click .78 On the Design Bar. select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. 79 In the Type Selector. 80 On the Options Bar.

Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. as shown. select Medium Lines. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. click (Mirror). click Detail Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. and on the Edit toolbar. 89 On the Design Bar. 92 Select the line. 90 In the Type Selector.

TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 103 Add two break lines as shown. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 97 On the Options Bar. 99 Click Modify. select the length dimension. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. select M_Break Line. enter 3mm. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. and press ENTER. click . 95 On the Design Bar. and click to place the arc as shown. 102 In the Type Selector. 101 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Lines.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . 106 Click to place the dimension. and click Modify. using the Drag Text grip. 105 In the drawing area. 108 In the Type Selector.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. 110 Select the dimension line. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. drag the text for the smaller dimension. 107 On the Design Bar. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. click Dimension.5mm Arial. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. click Dimension.

enter See Schedule. under Dimension Value. and click the dimension text.5mmArial. click Dimension. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. and then click the dimension text. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. 118 Select Modify to end the command. 113 Under Text Fields. select Replace With Text. 114 Click OK. select Replace With Text. under Dimension Value. and enter Varies.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog.2. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. for Below. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear .

121 Click OK. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 128 Select the note. 126 In the drawing area. click to create an arced leader. 125 In the Options Bar. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. click Text. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. and click to place the text. 127 Enter Gyp. 123 Click OK. click (Add Right Arc Leader). select the gypsum board region on the left. and click Modify. Board. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. and on the Options Bar. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.

131 On the Design Bar. 132 Save the file. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Modify to end the command.

and double-click East. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. click Training Files.rvt. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 339 . you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).

click Training Files. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 5 On the Options Bar.Hexagon. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 8 Select the keynote. type 1.rfa. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 7 On the Design Bar. for Number of Leaders.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Symbol. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. click Modify.

and click above the tag to place the copy. on the Options Bar. click (Copy). Creating a Note Block | 341 . 13 Select the tag. for Text. 12 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. type Seal existing doors and insulate. under Identity Data.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties).

click Copy. 19 With the tag selected. (Mirror). 15 For Text. on the Options Bar. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. type Repair existing door surround. 17 Click OK. 18 Using the same method. 16 For Tag. click (Element Properties). type B. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. and click. and on the Options Bar. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. on the Edit toolbar. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.14 With the copy selected. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

22 Optionally. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Repair existing door surround. Remove all existing windows. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Repair as required. Tuckpoint as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . click Modify. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required.21 On the Design Bar. and moving counter-clockwise. using the table as a reference. Clean exterior brick wall.

for Sort by. for Note block name. Select Text. under Available fields. type Mark. expand Schedules/Quantities. select Exterior Construction Notes. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. and click Add. select Tag. type Exterior Construction Notes. for the value. for Header text. 29 In the Project Browser. and select Bold. 26 Click OK. 28 In the Project Browser. type Description. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. and for Alignment. and click OK. On the Appearance tab. verify that Arial is selected. 27 In the column header (text). On the Formatting tab. type 6 mm. select Center. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. Create. expand Sheets (all). for Heading. and click Add.Elevations. Clean cut and repair wall as required. format. select Tag. and double-click A103 .Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. and drag it to the sheet. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.Title Sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. click Modify.31 On the Design Bar.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click T . you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. under Sheets (all). Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.rvt.

and expand the right column to accommodate the text. double-click T . change Drawing List to Sheet Index. for Filter by. type T. and click Add. for Sort by. expand Schedules/Quantities. select Sheet Index. select does not equal. under Available fields. Select Sheet Name. ■ 4 Click OK. select Sheet Number. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click Add. under Sheets (all).Title Sheet. 7 In the Project Browser. select Sheet Number. select Sheet Number. On the Filter tab. The drawing list displays. 5 In the list title field. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. in the first field. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 6 In the Project Browser.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. in the second field. and in the third field. and drag it to the sheet.

Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. windows. and door frames. On construction documents. 11 Save the file. For the text. Training File Using Legends | 347 . you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference.9 On the Design Bar. and so on). The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. doors. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. door frame schedule. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. Finally. click Modify. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. On construction documents.

Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. for Name. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 9 For Text Font.Open Level Head . and click OK. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Arial. 6 On the Options Bar. for Name.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Edit/New. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. type 3mm. type Legend Text. and click OK. click . You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 For Text Size. type Typical Symbol Legend. click Text. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. click Duplicate. click Symbol. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a text type with the necessary size. and click OK twice.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . 8 In the Type Properties dialog.

Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. expand Sheets (all). verify that is selected. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and double-click A101 . expand Legends. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. and for Leader. click Typical Symbol Legend. 16 In the Project Browser. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . 14 Working from the top down.Site Plan/Floor Plan. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.

21 In the Type Selector. 23 Save the file. 18 On the Design Bar. under Sheets. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. 19 In the Project Browser.Unit 18. and click to place it. 22 On the Design Bar. select Viewport : No Titlemark. click Modify. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. double-click A102 . select Viewport : No Titlemark.17 In the Type Selector. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. click Modify.

select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. For View. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . select Section. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 5 On the View Control Bar. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. and click OK. select Medium for Detail Level. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. 3 For Scale. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. type 900 mm. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. select 1 : 50. For Host length.rvt. for Name. type 4th Floor Wall Types. and press ENTER. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. click Legend Component. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall.

352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 12 In the Type Selector. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line.9 On the Design Bar. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. 13 On the Options Bar.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. click Text. 10 Select the second wall. click Modify. for Family. and on the Options Bar. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to add text without a leader. for Leader.

The text note with leader is added to the legend. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. select Level 4. click to add text with a single-segment leader. and drag it to the new sheet. 19 Type the following text.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. and click New Sheet. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . right-click Sheets (all). 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. under Floor Plans. 23 In the Project Browser. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.

Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 26 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. The open drawings are both visible. 29 In the Project Browser. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select 4th Floor Wall Types. click Modify to end the command. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. drag it onto the sheet. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. under Legends. double-click Level 4.25 In the Project Browser.

zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 33 In the floor plan view. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 34 Select the patio divider wall. click (Match Type). select the Wall Type 2 component. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 35 On the View Control Bar.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. select Detail Level: Medium.

Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project.36 Optionally. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. contractor inquiries. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. double-click Level 4. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. under Floor Plans. In this exercise. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. These changes can be due to owner requests. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. Using the table. click 37 Save the file. or changes in building material availability. You can create a sequence of revisions. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract.

revision descriptions should be comprehensive. If you select Per Sheet. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. When you use this option. yet as concise as possible. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. the revision is locked and issued to the field. 7 Under Show. If Visible is not selected. if the active revision is number 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. In general. 5 For Description. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. For example. verify that Per Project is selected. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. In most instances.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. When Issued is selected. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. for Numbering. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. type a date.

3 Select the divider. move the cursor up. click (Move). 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. double-click Level 4.8 Click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 6 On the Design Bar. Revision clouds have read-only properties. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 9 Save the file. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. under Floor Plans. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. you make changes to the project floor plan. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. 5 Select the divider. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. including revision number and revision date. click Modify.

In the Snaps dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 .Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. select Snaps Off. click Finish Sketch. 8 In the drawing area. click near the partition you moved. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Revision Cloud.

17 Save the file. select 6. for Line Weight. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 16 Click OK. you load a revision tag into the project.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. click the Annotation Objects tab. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise.

You then issue a revision. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. 8 In the Tags dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Leader. the cloud is tagged as number 1. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. 10 In the drawing area. 5 In the Tags dialog. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. click Tags. Working with Revisions In this exercise. and because the revision is the first in the project. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. Because you chose to number by project.rvt. 11 Click to place the tag. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. click Training Files. 12 Save the file.rfa. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. under Floor Plans. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. 6 Click Load. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. double-click Level 4. click OK. you need to add one. 4 On the Options Bar. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you create additional revisions in the revision table. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. scroll down to Revision Clouds. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes.

you can no longer modify it. and enter a date for the revision. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.Unnamed. you prevent further changes to the revision. 8 Add another revision row. double-click A107 . 9 Click OK.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. under Sheets. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and enter a date. 7 For Description. You do this by issuing the revision. click Add.rvt. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. You can continue to add revisions. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type Modify Paving Area. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Issued. NOTE After you issue a revision. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. with the description Relocate Door. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog.

under Sheets (all). 3 . 11 On the Drafting tab. select Seq. double-click Level 4. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. Working with Revisions | 363 . 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. click to add a revision clouds. 10 In the Project Browser.Relocate Door to the revision cloud.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. 2 . for Revision. 13 Click Finish Sketch. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. 17 Using the same method learned previously. select Revision Cloud. 19 To add tags. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. 15 On the Options Bar.Modify Paving Area. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 12 In the drawing area. apply Seq. under Floor Plans. select the revision cloud. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule.Unnamed. 20 On the Project Browser. in the drawing area. double-click A107 . select Tag ➤ By Category. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area.

You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. Click Options. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. for Numbering. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. For each revision. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. for Sequence. height. You do this so that the revision can be changed. 25 Click OK twice.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. and rotation) to the revision schedule. select Alphabetic. clear Issued. beginning with "D". 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . delete the first 3 characters. select the titleblock. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. 26 In the drawing area. you edit the titleblock family.

click Load into Projects. Select Outline. and drag it above the schedule area. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 28 In the alert dialog. Clear Blank row before data. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. click Edit. for Appearance. right-click Revision Schedule. for Build Schedule. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. under Other. click Edit Family. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Working with Revisions | 365 .27 On the Options Bar. click Yes. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. and press DELETE. 34 On the Design Bar. Select Grid lines. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. click Yes. click Modify. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. select Bottom-up. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and click Properties. 33 Select the schedule header.

for Height. select 90° Counterclockwise. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Click OK twice. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. enter Rev. for Heading.. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. for Rotation on Sheet. 40 Select the revision schedule header. open the titleblock family for editing. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. 45 On the Appearance tab. under Other. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. right-click Revision Schedule. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. for Formatting. and click Properties. With a user-defined height. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. When the height property is variable. select User defined. click Edit. select the revision schedule.

click Load into Projects. 51 Save the file.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. text. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . you learn to import information (such as images. click Yes. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet.

368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click T .JPG. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and place it on a sheet. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.rvt. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click to add text without a leader. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. double-click T . you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. for Leader. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 1 In the Project Browser. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet. click Training Files. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. click Text.rvt. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.Title Sheet. under Sheets.Importing Image Files In this exercise. under Sheets. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar.

Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. with the new text box still selected.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. click Modify. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet.doc text file in another window. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . 6 Select the text. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 11 Save the file. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. 9 On the Design Bar. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image.

type Fixture Schedule. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog.rvt. This exercise demonstrates a common method. and click Save. under Sheets. This step has been completed for you. for Name. 4 Under Printer. and saved as Fixture Schedule.Unit 18. click Modify. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .JPG. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.mdi. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. click Desktop. click File menu ➤ Print. 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. select the document writer. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. 12 Save the file. 5 Click OK. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 10 On the Design Bar.JPG. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format.xls. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. double-click A102 . for File name. click Training Files. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 3 In Microsoft Excel. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. This process may vary from system to system. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog.

you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. called dependent views. 371 . To effectively document this project. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. you break up the plan into sections. The large floor plan. or footprint. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. as well as a large lab building.

372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. click Training Files. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. for Name. under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 . double-click Level 2. 4 In the Rename View dialog. under Level 2. 3 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit.Aviary. select the crop region.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. 6 In the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. The dependent view opens. and the model crop is the interior crop region. 5 Click in the drawing area. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. and click Rename. and click OK. right-click Dependent on Level 2.

9 On the View Control Bar.8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). click (Hide Crop Region).

376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 12 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2.10 Click in the drawing area. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). click Zoom To Fit. and click OK. click Zoom To Fit. 15 Select the crop region. and on the Zoom flyout. 11 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Rename View dialog. for Name. 14 Click in the drawing area. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. and click Rename. enter Level 2 .Labs.

19 On the View Control Bar. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. double-click Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar. and on the Zoom flyout. click Matchline. click (Hide Crop Region). 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 20 Click in the drawing area. click Modify. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom To Fit.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 .The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. under Floor Plans.

Click above the left corner of the lab building. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 24 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. and click.

under Floor Plans.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click the Annotation Objects tab. select 9. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. select Double Dash. 33 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Aviary. click Level 2 . for Name. and click OK. 31 In the Project Browser. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click Rename. for Line Weight. and drag it onto the sheet. expand Sheets.Aviary. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click OK. 27 Under Matchline.Unnamed. 28 For Line Pattern. right-click A101 . 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 .

36 Use the same method to create another sheet. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Target view.Labs dependent view on the sheet. click View Reference. 39 On the Options Bar. click Modify. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. double-click Level 2. and place the Level 2 . 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.35 On the Design Bar.Aviary is selected. under Floor Plans.

45 On the Zoom flyout. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 44 On the Design Bar. click Zoom To Fit. click Modify.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. for Target view. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 41 On the Options Bar.Labs. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.

Aviary. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .46 In the Project Browser. 48 Select the crop region. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. click (Show Crop Region). and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. 47 On the View Control Bar. right-click. under Floor Plans. after modifying the annotation crop region. double-click Level 2 . 49 If. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. click the far right control.

and click Apply Dependent Views. 55 On the Zoom flyout. right-click Level 2. select all views in the list. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. 53 In the Select Views dialog. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 52 In the Project Browser. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. 51 On the View Control Bar.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . expand Level 1. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 54 In the Project Browser. but are not placed on sheets. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. and click OK. click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click South Elevation. 2 In the Project Browser. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click Training Files. The matchline is already placed in the view. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit.57 On the Zoom flyout. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. and double-click South Elevation.

12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. and drag it toward the center of the view. enter South Elevation . click (Hide Crop Region). enter South Elevation . 5 In the drawing area. and click Rename. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. select the Crop Region. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. cropping the view to the aviary.Left. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . cropping the view to the lab building. for Name. 11 Select the crop region. 8 In the Project Browser.The dependent view opens. and click OK. and click OK. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. expand South Elevation. and click Rename. right-click South Elevation. 7 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Project Browser. for Name.Right. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 10 In the Rename View dialog.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View | 403 . click Modify. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise.15 On the Design Bar. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View on page 403.

404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .rvt. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. The perspective view displays. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. on the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera.

the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. as shown. right-click 3D View 1. double-click Site. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. and click Show Camera. With the camera shown. in the Project Browser. and adjust the field of vision.3 Zoom out. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. Depending on camera placement. If the camera is not shown in the view. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. as necessary. and select the crop boundary. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard.

7 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Exterior . 10 Save the file.Day to open the view.Day. enter Exterior . right-click 3D View 1. and click Rename. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.6 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

c_Pool_House_in_progress. and render a daytime view of the exterior. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.Day. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior.rvt. You then duplicate the view. modify render settings. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . under 3D Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Exterior .Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise.

8 Under Quality. click (Show Rendering Dialog). select Edit/New. 5 In the Rename dialog. select Medium. 3pm. select Spring Equinox. 6 Click OK twice. 3 In the Rendering dialog. for Setting. for Sun. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Render. under Background. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. enter Spring Equinox .Santa Monica. You create a location and time for the rendering. and click Rename. You adjust cloud settings as required. In this case. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. NOTE If a background image is required. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. under Lighting. 7 In the Rendering dialog. select Sky: Cloudy. for New. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar.

9 In the Rendering dialog. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. For Files of type. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Export. After the image is rendered. Click Save. 10 In the Rendering dialog. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . select Portable Network Graphics (*. click Show the rendering. click Show the model. click Desktop. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference.png).

add 30 :Sconce Light . 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Exterior . 27 In the Rendering dialog. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Scheme. To select a sequential list. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. under Ungrouped Lights.Flat Round : 60W . 16 With the Exterior .120V to the Pool Lights group. for Name.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . highlight 9 :Sconce Light . 22 Using the same method. and click OK.Flat Round : 60W . select Exterior: Artificial only. under Group Options. click OK.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . click Render. and select the last light. under Group Options. click New. and click Artificial Lights.Night. press and hold SHIFT. click New. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. and click OK. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.Night view open. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. and click Move to Group. right-click Exterior . 21 In the Light Groups dialog. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view.Flat Round : 60W . enter Pool Lights. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Dialog). 24 In the New Light Group dialog. enter Pool House Lights. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Night.Day view to Exterior . To create a similar view using different rendering settings. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under Ungrouped Lights. 25 Using the same method.120V.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. you duplicate the view and change the settings. dialog. for Name. select the first light.Day. and click OK. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . under Lighting. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights .Flat Round : 60W . on the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. verify that Pool Lights is selected.

31 Close the Rendering dialog. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. In this example.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. under Image. 30 In the Rendering dialog. you change the brightness of the exposure. and click OK. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . 32 Save the file. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. click Adjust Exposure. for Exposure Value. After the image is rendered. click Show the model. enter 4.

you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Adding RPC People In this exercise. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . define the perspective view and rendering settings. and finally. render the views. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house.

Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. click Component. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 1. click Modify. 6 Select the figure. and place the component inside the pool house. Adding RPC People | 413 . but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. the person’s line of sight. 5 On the Design Bar. select RPC Female : YinYin. ■ (Rotate). Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. Exact placement is not important.

the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. on the Options Bar. select Cast Reflections. click Edit/New. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. By default. 12 Click OK 3 times. 13 On the Design Bar. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. click Modify. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Save the file. under Identity Data. click (Element Properties). for Render Appearance Properties. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. under Parameters. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. click Edit. you can enable this option. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In order to see the figure’s reflection.

c_Pool_House_in_progress.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. click Camera. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.rvt. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps.

The perspective view displays. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. under Extents. and click OK. and click Properties. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. select Section Box. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. right-click 3D View 1. under 3D Views. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . in addition to the 3D view. 11 In the 3D view. double-click South. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click Level 1. 8 In the Project Browser.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. under Elevations (Building Elevations). In order to accurately adjust the section box. select the section box.

12 In the floor plan view. select the section box. 14 In the 3D view. right-click. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . size the box as shown. size the box as shown. 13 In the South Elevation view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

17 Save the file. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. To create a daytime view. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. doors that contain windows or glass. and curtain walls. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall.15 Maximize the 3D view. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. and render the interior view.

and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. 3 On the View Control Bar. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. under 3D Views. select Interior: Artificial only. 7 Under Quality. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. clear Pool Lights. 5 Click Artificial Lights. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. click (Show Rendering Dialog). and click OK. for Scheme. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight.Night.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 In the Rendering dialog. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. 4 In the Rendering dialog. click Render. enter Interior . for Setting. under Lighting. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . You can specify a lower quality. After these settings are established.rvt. and click OK. c_Pool_House_in_progress. right-click 3D View 1. you turn them off for this scene. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. 2 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. select Draft.

select Spring Equinox . click 14 For Setting. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. For sunlit interiors.Santa Monica. select Region. in order to turn on daylight portals. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Walls.9 Close the Rendering dialog. the daylight portals can be turned on. and click OK. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . The preset schemes are read-only. 13 In the Rendering dialog. for Daylight Portal Options. For more information on daylight portals. right-click Interior . you must create a custom setting. and click Render. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. 17 In the Rendering dialog. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. for Scheme. select Edit. 3pm. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. but the space will receive standard daylighting. for Sun. In this case. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. By default they are turned off. select Interior: Sun only. click Copy To Custom.Night. (Show Rendering Dialog). Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . You create a view for the interior during the day. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes.Day.

select the column on the right. click Properties).18 In the Rendering dialog. and close the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. In the next steps. For Saturation. 20 In the Rendering dialog. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. under Image. enter 10. enter 1. Click OK. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. and on the Options Bar. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Adjust Exposure. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light.

click (Show Rendering Dialog). 28 In the Rendering dialog. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. For Rotate. click the dimensions for Size. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. As size and DPI are increased. and on the Options Bar. clear Region. under Output Settings. select the crop boundary. and click Render. select Unfinished. For Bump. 23 With the column still selected. 29 In the Rendering dialog. 26 Click Update Preview. Click OK. select Based on wood grain. click OK.22 In the Element Properties dialog. select Scale (locked proportions). You change the varnish setting. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. add a bump map to create texture. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. for Setting. 32 In the Rendering dialog. enter 90. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. select High.6. for Resolution. select Wood. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. select Printer. enter 5''. For Width. For Amount. and click OK. 24 In the Materials dialog. the render time increases significantly. 30 In the drawing area. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar.

you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default.The rendered image displays. The walkthrough path is a spline. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. In a plan view. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . or section view. but you can also define it in a 3D. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Usually. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. independent of the Revit Architecture software. elevation. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline.

proceeds through the dining room. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. and click the tab in the context menu. and ends in the far corner of the living room. verify that Perspective is selected. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Walkthrough. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (all). Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. If you prefer to use metric values. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. and change unit formats as desired. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the Options Bar. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and double-click 1st Floor. and open Common\c_Townhouse. expand Floor Plans. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. right-click in the Design Bar. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown.rvt. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . click Training Files.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse.

on the Options Bar. click Finish.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Walkthrough 1. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser.

17 Click . 16 On the Options Bar. 11 Under Change. on the Options Bar. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). enter 9''. and select the crop boundary. and click OK. If it is not. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. enter 16''. 13 On the Options Bar. for Width. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. verify that Field of view is selected. for Frame. 14 Click . 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. click Edit Walkthrough. enter 1. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. and click OK. click the dimensions for Size. select the crop boundary. and for Height. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 12 On the View menu. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x).

Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. click Edit Walkthrough. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . c_Townhouse. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. under Extents. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. double-click 1st Floor. press ESC. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. 2 On the Options Bar. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. click (Element Properties). proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans.The walkthrough plays. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. clear Far Clip Active. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.

5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. 7 Click the third key frame position. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . You can move any camera target or key frame position. for Controls. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. 6 On the Options Bar. and drag it to the location shown. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. select Path.

2 In the Length/Format dialog. for Compressor. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 8 If you want to save this exercise. for Model Graphics Style. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement.rvt. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. enter 15. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. click Edit Walkthrough. and click OK. shading. double-click Walkthrough 1. specifying the number of frames. When you export the walkthrough. shading with edges. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. 3 Under Format. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click Save. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Walkthroughs. and click OK. select <Shading>. 9 To play the walkthrough. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. click File menu ➤ Save As. hidden line. under Output Length. c_Townhouse. reducing the size of the image. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. . If you are unsure of what option to use. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. or rendering. for Frames/sec. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. The walkthrough is recorded. on the Options Bar. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430.

You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. 431 . More specifically. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. In this tutorial. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Courtyard View In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. (SteeringWheels). A 3D view is created. as shown. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. click Training Files.Creating a Solar Study . and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. click shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 4 On the View toolbar. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. expand Views (all).rvt. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 01 Entry. click Camera. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

under Floor Plans. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. if necessary. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. right-click 3D View 1. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. click Section. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 .Courtyard View. 3 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Rename View dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click 01 Entry. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 7 In the Project Browser. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. you create a section cutaway view. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and.5 On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. 9 On the File menu. click Modify. click Save As. as shown. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. enter Solar Study . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433.

click 10 On the View toolbar. and click OK. and click Rename. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. double-click the section head. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. (SteeringWheels). as shown.5 On the Design Bar. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 7 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click Modify. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 6 To view the section. click . right-click Section 1. expand Sections. 11 On the SteeringWheel. 13 On the Design Bar.

18 On the File menu. then select Medium. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 15 In the Rename View dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 To hide the section box. Typical plan views. click . under 3D Views. clear Section Boxes. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. 16 On the View Control Bar. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. and click OK. and click Rename. as shown. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . under Floor Plans. 5 In the Project Browser. On the Annotation Categories tab. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. click Callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. 6 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename.14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. In some cases. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. you create a plan cutaway view. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. then Fine. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. right-click {3D}. click Save. including the house. do not display many elements in 3D. under Floor Plans. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. double-click 01 Entry. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation.

11 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . so you can see into the building from the top. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click Modify. as shown. as shown. click (SteeringWheels). 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building.8 On the View toolbar. 15 Select the Roof. 16 On the View Control Bar. 9 On the SteeringWheel.

18 In the Project Browser. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. click Save. under 3D Views. right-click {3D}.17 On the View Control Bar. 20 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. 21 On the File menu. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . 19 In the Rename View dialog. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . and preview the effects of each study as an animation. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. and click Rename. and click OK.

rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. for City. 9 In the Name dialog. 3 Select Cast Shadows. For the Single-Day solar study. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 4 For Sun Position. USA is selected. . 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. and time. click click OK. click .Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. or multi-day solar study. and time range. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. expand Views (all). CA. date. expand 3D Views.Creating Solar Studies . Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. single-day. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. For the Multi-Day solar study. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. you specify the location. 10 Under Place. you specify the location.Boston. For this study. click . You can create a still. MA. USA. date range. select Los Angeles. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. enter Summer Solstice. and click Duplicate. leave the slider at 50. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . Click the Single-Day tab. Los Angeles.

14 In this case. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 2008.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Under Frame. enter 20 and press ENTER. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.Courtyard View is currently displayed. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Los Angeles. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select June 22. click . Los Angeles. click OK. select December 22. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Winter Solstice. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. and click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. 2008. click . and click OK. 19 On the File menu. 6 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. For Time Range. on the Single-Day tab. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . enter 10 and press ENTER. ■ For Time Interval. click OK. confirm that Summer Solstice. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. select Winter Solstice. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click Save. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. for Date. for Sun Position. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Frame. Clear Ground Plane at Level. Los Angeles is selected. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 16 In the Name dialog. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. 8 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. and click Duplicate.

click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click . for Sun Position. and click OK. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. 13 On the View Control Bar. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Floor Plans. . PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. Los Angeles. double-click 01 Entry. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click Text. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. click To display the next sequential frame. on the Single-Day tab. select Summer Solstice. click OK. The solar study animation plays.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. approximately as shown. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser.■ To display the next key frame. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. click To play the animation from start to finish. click . click . 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . . .

click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. 6 On the View Control Bar. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. On the Options Bar.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. click Lines. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. click . as shown. as shown. 5 In the Project Browser. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Click and enter Dining. 8 For Sun Position. click . Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. approximately as shown. expand 3D Views.

and click OK. 12 In the drawing area. Los Angeles. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. if necessary. select Section Boxes. 14 Click outside of the section box. 11 To display the section box. under Output Length. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . ■ For Frames per second. On the Annotation Categories tab. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. as shown. select the section box. verify that the value is set to 15. and enter 5 to 50. 15 To hide the section box. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. select Summer Solstice. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. on the Single-Day tab. select Frame Range. clear Section Boxes. and click OK.

under Output Length. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. on the Single-Day tab. enter 450 in the first field (width). In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. Under Format. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Winter Solstice. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . for Model Graphics Style. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. To maintain the proportions of the frame. select AVI Files. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. To view the animation. and click OK. Los Angeles. for Compressor. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. click . Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . you open each image. For Frames per second. 2 On the View Control Bar.■ ■ Under Format.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. click OK. for Model Graphics Style. 3 For Sun Position. For File Name. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. select Frame Range. and click OK. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Los Angeles. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. of the animation separately. Click OK. verify that Hidden Line is selected. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. verify that Hidden Line is selected. and enter 5 to 10. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. For Files of Type. or frame. For Dimensions. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. verify that the value is set to 15. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed.

the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. depending on the Frame Range.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. as shown: 9 On the File menu. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. such as JPEG. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped.■ For Dimensions. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . 8 Click Save. or GIF. For Files of Type. or any single-frame format. under 3D Views. In this example. enter 450 in the first field (width). and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click the Desktop icon. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. BMP. Click OK. For File name. select PNG.Los Angeles. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. TIFF. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. click Save.

2 Select the section box in the drawing area. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. as shown. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 .

MA. for File name enter 2pm . 12 In the Name dialog. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Time Interval. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. select One week. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . clear Section Boxes. and on the View Control Bar. 5 Select the roof. for Sun Position. 8 On the View Control Bar. click OK. and click OK.Boston.Los Angeles . On the Annotation Categories tab. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. specify 2:00 pm.Week Interval. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . click the Multi-Day tab. and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. and click Duplicate. USA. For Time. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

model views.West or North . you mirror all model elements.South. 17 On the View Control Bar. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . Mirroring the Project In this exercise. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Compressor. Click the Desktop icon. and click Save.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. click OK. under Floor Plans. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. When you mirror a project. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. and click OK. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. In the Length/Format dialog. double-click 01 Entry.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. such as East . You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. and annotations in non-drafting views. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. for File Name.

right-click. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. select the roof. For additional information. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. select East . The project is mirrored along the East . under 3D Views. 6 On the Standard toolbar. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. click OK. In this exercise. and click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.West axis. Then. 2 In the drawing area.West. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. 5 In the warning dialog. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help.

and click OK. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. and click OK. 12 Under Date and Time. and click OK. Orienting to True North | 449 . 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Apply. specify 11:00 AM for time. select Summer Solstice. select Cast Shadows. click . click the Still tab. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 8 For Sun Position. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. For example. 5 For Sun Position. and select Winter Solstice.3 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. on the Still tab. click . to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. 11 For Sun Position. 10 Under Date and Time. change the time back to 12:00 PM. click .

NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. click . IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Orientation. and click OK. and select Winter Solstice. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Project Browser. This process establishes the view setting to True North. click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. the view settings must be set for True North. click OK. double-click 01 Entry. click the Still tab. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. 19 In the Project Browser. select True North. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. and click Properties. 15 For Sun Position. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). When a project is started. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. right click 01 Entry. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK.

click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. Orienting to True North | 451 .■ To establish the True North direction. click toward the top of the screen. The floor plan rotates in the view. as shown. ■ To establish the new direction of True North.

right-click 01 Entry. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. and click OK. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 32 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. select Project North. under 3D Views. and click Apply. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 28 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. enter True North Orientation. click the Still tab. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select True North Orientation. right-click 01 Entry. 24 In the Element Properties dialog.23 In the Project Browser. for Orientation. select True North. select Summer Solstice. and click Properties. and click Element Properties. right-click. click . 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Rename. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 33 For Sun Position. 27 In the Rename View dialog. for Orientation.

and click OK. Los Angeles. For File Name. click the Single-Day tab. for Dimensions. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. and click OK.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter 600 in the first field. In the Length/Format dialog. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. For Files of Type. for Compressor. click the Desktop icon. Click Save. click OK. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Format. click Summer Solstice. Click OK. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. Orienting to True North | 453 . verify that AVI Files is selected. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically.

you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. In the Name dialog. select Edit/New. Since a rendered image is temporary. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Interior: Sun only. 3 On the View Control Bar. and click Duplicate. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. Rendered views do not have this limitation. 1 In the Project Browser. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. for Date and Time. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. for Scheme. select Winter Solstice. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. select Medium. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. under 3D Views. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. click Render. and click OK. under Settings. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. (Show Rendering Dialog). ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. capturing it. and click OK. select 12/22. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. under Quality. In this exercise. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. Under Lighting. For Sun.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under 3D Views. and 2:00 PM. and exporting it as a JPEG image.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. for Setting. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.

click Desktop. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. For Files of type. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. and click Save.6 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . click Export. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. click Save to Project. and click OK. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. verify that JPEG Files is selected. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. enter living area_winter solstice. NOTE Rendered views are temporary.

456 .

and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. Using the pre-built building model. For the realistic approach. an outside reviewer. Other tools in the software. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. and details. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. Whether the audience is the general contractor. and section boxes. In this tutorial. a consultant. length. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. sections. or the client.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. linework. type. elevations. advanced model graphics. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. you can choose between realism and stylistics. you explore the stylistic approach. 457 . Co-house. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. When organizing presentation graphics. however. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. In this series of exercises. They include rendering.

458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create a copy of the plan. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a presentation floor plan. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. To fit the floor plan into the analytique.

Cnst.rvt. right-click 2nd Flr. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. click in the drawing area. Cnst.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. click Training Files. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. and click OK. exit the menu. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Browser. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 .

Down Arrow. 11 In the Save As directory. this represents the view getting smaller. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. expand the Stairs category. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. click the Annotation Categories tab. 8 Click OK. click the Scale control and select 1:100. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. No annotations display in the view. and other annotations in this view. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. elevations. sections.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and clear DOWN Text. navigate to the folder of your choice. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. This turns off the visibility of all tags. dimensions. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. and Up Arrow. UP Text. Notice the immediate change in the line weights.rvt. 7 Under Visibility. and click Save. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460.

select Boston. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. 9 For City. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. Within a project. Cnst. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. for Date and Time. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. 1:00 PM. modify. select Cast Shadows. however. The higher the number. the darker the shadows. 12 Click OK. click OK. Time and Place. MA. 3 On the View Control Bar. click . select By Date. double-click it in the Project Browser. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. specify 35. select Sun and Shadow Settings. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and select 1st Flr. ■ For Contrast. and click OK. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. you can select any city.rvt. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. you can create. on the Still tab. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. If you select a different city. 7 For Place. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Place tab. 6 Under Settings. For Sun Position. click . This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. click (Shadows Off). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. NOTE For this step. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. 2 On the View Control Bar. specify 10/27. At that place.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view.

and click OK. click (Shadows On). 19 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. . This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. and click Advanced Model Graphics.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Settings. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . clear Ground Plane at Level. for Sun Position. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click OK. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet.

5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. click Sheet. and click to place it. 4 In the Views dialog. and notice the view title. click Modify. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. The viewport displays at the cursor. TIP If the View tab is not available. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click the Design Bar. click Add View. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. select Arch Portrait. and click Add View to Sheet. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

For this analytique. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. for Show Title. enter Presentation. and click Activate View. 12 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. The viewport no longer displays a view title. under Graphics. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select No. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click . To accomplish this. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. and click OK. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. click OK. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. click Duplicate.

click . 22 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and the boundary of the region. 18 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. If necessary. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . select Invisible lines. fill properties. click Edit/New. click . 17 In the Type Selector. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. and select Chain.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. When you finish drawing the chain. click Region Properties. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. 20 On the Options Bar. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. click Filled Region. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region.

for Fill Pattern. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. and click OK. enter Solid Black. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 30 On the Design Bar. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. and click Deactivate View. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. select Solid fill. 25 In the Name dialog. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. click OK. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. click Duplicate. click . scroll down. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. enter Presentation. under Graphics. 26 In the Type Properties dialog.24 In the Type Properties dialog. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. under Name. for Sheet Name. under Identity Data. and click OK. and click OK. and click View Properties.

rvt.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click South.

14 For Sun Position. under Elevations. Time and Place. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. and click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. expand the Doors category. and clear Elevation Swing. and click OK. select By Date. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. 13 For Contrast. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.2 In the Project Browser. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 9 Click OK. under Visibility. specify 2:30 PM. clear Visible. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. enter Presentation South Elevation. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. on the Model Categories tab. exit the menu. select Cast Shadows. 18 For Time. click Duplicate. click OK. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Override. click . enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click in the Walls row. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 12 Under Shadow. under Settings. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. click in the drawing area. specify 35. click (Shadows Off). In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. right-click Copy of South. scroll up. under Pattern Overrides. By changing the angle of the sun. and click OK. 16 In the Name dialog. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Visibility. 11 On the View Control Bar. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet.rvt.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Views dialog. double-click A105 . 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Add View.

The viewport displays a view title. The view title no longer displays. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. 5 In the Type Selector.

click Modify. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan.

select 1: 100. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. and use the flip arrows if necessary. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. under Floor Plans. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 1st Flr. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Cnst. click Section. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. 3 On the Options Bar. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt. 4 Add the section shown below. for Scale.

as shown. click Callout. expand Sections (Callout 1). for Scale. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. and double-click Section 2.Section 2 is added to the building model. select 1 : 100. To accomplish this. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. To fit correctly in the analytique. this view needs to be rotated 180°.

under Pattern Overrides.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. double-click Presentation Section 2. click Modify. and click OK. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 12 In the Project Browser. 15 Under Visibility. enter Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Callout 1). clear Visible. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. expand the Doors category. click Override. and click Rename. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. click in the Walls row. under Sections (Callout 1). 17 Under Visibility. and clear Elevation Swing. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. scroll up. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click the Model Categories tab. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 11 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Callout of Section 2.

24 Proceed with the next exercise. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. (Hide Crop Region). This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . 20 Click OK. 22 On the View Control Bar. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. When you select the crop region. click The crop regions no longer display. and clear Show annotation categories in this view.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

■ For Sun Position. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify the following: Under Shadow. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. Click Apply. In addition. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify 35. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. in the Project Browser. 2 On the View Control Bar. The shadows do not offer much contrast. and click OK. double-click Presentation Section 2.rvt. under Sections (Callout 1). click . and click Advanced Model Graphics. In the steps that follow. select Cast Shadows. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). For Contrast. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. click Duplicate. 6 In the Name dialog.

select Silhouette Edges. was added to this training file for training purposes. select Directly. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Silhouette style. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. click OK. For Altitude. specify 70°. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. Silhouette Edges. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. and click OK. click (Shadows On). Select Relative to View. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. specify 135°. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. For Azimuth. Click OK. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. NOTE The line style. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click A105 . you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt. 3 In the Views dialog. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. and click to place the selected view. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. under Sheets (all).Presentation. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select Section: Presentation Section 2.

Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser.5 In the Type Selector. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. and press Enter. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. The view title no longer displays. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . 9 On the Edit toolbar. 6 On the Design Bar. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. click Modify. you click to specify the start radius. Using a clock as a reference. double-click Section 2. The section needs to be rotated 180°. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. click (Rotate). select Viewport : Presentation. In the steps that follow. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. under Sections (Callout 1). To rotate an object.

double-click A105 . 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned.The callout rotates 180°.Presentation. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. under Sheets (all). 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . and drag it up and to the left as shown.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. After applying the view template to a new section view. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet.

3 In the New View Template dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Section 2. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. right-click Copy of Section 1. and click OK.rvt.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. right-click Section 1. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. and click Rename. under Sections (Type 1). you can simply apply the presentation view template. enter Presentation Section 1. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. 7 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Type 1). 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. enter Presentation. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 4 In the View Templates dialog. click OK.

17 In the Element Properties dialog. for Rotation on Sheet.Presentation. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and click Deactivate View. and elevation swings no longer display.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. click Add View. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. under Graphics. 14 In the Type Selector. under Sheets (all). and click Add View to Sheet. annotations. select 90° Counterclockwise. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. 15 Right-click the viewport. 18 Right-click the viewport. and click Activate View. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . and click OK. select Section: Presentation Section 1. and click OK. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click A105 . under Names. select Viewport : Presentation. The furniture. 12 In the Views dialog. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Presentation. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. lighting fixtures.

Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. In this exercise. such as a tracery window or a column capital.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . traditional analytiques contain a detail.

3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 .Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Rename. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Callout of Section 1. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Modify.rvt. select the callout. click Callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. After you add the callout. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. as shown. double-click Section 1. under Sections (Callout 1). 4 In the Project Browser.

and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Crop Region Visible. 7 Select the crop region. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region.5 In the Rename View dialog. enter Presentation Callout. as shown. 8 Right-click. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click Presentation Callout. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. clear Annotation Crop. and click View Properties. under Extents. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

For Scale Value 1.Presentation. double-click A105 . Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . click Modify. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select Custom. under Sheets (all). do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. select Viewport : Presentation. 14 In the Type Selector. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. specify 22.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. Click OK. 15 On the Design Bar. click Add View. 12 In the Views dialog. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click Add View to Sheet. select Section: Presentation Callout. and click Activate View.

and click Deactivate View. click Filled Region. 23 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). 24 In the Element Properties dialog. activate the viewport. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. and make adjustments as necessary. and move it to the position shown below. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. When finished. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. click Region Properties. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. In the steps that follow. double-click Presentation Callout.

Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.25 In the Type Properties dialog. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. under Sheets (all). for Fill Pattern. click Finish Sketch. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. click Filled Region. and click Activate View. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. select Solid fill. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click . When you are finished. and click OK 3 times. double-click A105 . on the Design Bar.Presentation. 28 In the Project Browser.

34 Select the crop region. 32 On the Design Bar. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Finish Sketch. click (Show Crop Region). click . The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays.31 On the Options Bar. 33 On the View Control Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below.

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. and click Deactivate View. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.35 On the View Control Bar. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . click (Hide Crop Region).

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. click the Scale control. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 5 On the View Control Bar. and click 1 : 200. 3 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and apply shadows to the views. click (Shadows Off).rvt. double-click Isometric. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. under 3D Views.

A section box displays around the building model. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. right-click Isometric 1. select Silhouette Edges. enter Isometric 2. and click Rename. 14 In the Project Browser. For Contrast. click . and click OK. right-click Isometric. under Extents.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. under 3D Views. specify 45°. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . Cnst. 12 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. click Duplicate. Select Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. 15 In the Rename View dialog. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. and click OK. under 3D Views. in the list. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. Select 1st Flr. For Sun Position. Click OK. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. For Azimuth. double-click Isometric 2. and click Rename. Select Relative to View. specify 35. For Altitude. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. specify 135°. enter Isometric 1. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. 8 In the Name dialog. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. select Section Box. select Directly. for Silhouette style. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. 13 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

as shown.19 Select the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. Grips display on each face of the section box. When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

right-click Isometric 2. 22 In the Project Browser. If desired. select Viewport : Presentation. click Modify on the Design Bar.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. 27 Select the section box. and click Rename. 31 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser. On the Annotation Categories tab. under 3D Views. clear Section Boxes. double-click A105 . clear Section Boxes. enter Isometric 3. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. 29 To hide the section box. 25 To hide the section box. and click OK. the stairs and railings may display. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. On the Annotation Categories tab. under 3D Views. under Sheets (all). double-click Isometric 3. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. double-click Isometric 2.Presentation. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Next. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. make a copy of the view. and click OK. and click OK. 23 In the Rename View dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you can adjust the plane location. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. When you are finished. The section box no longer displays.

drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. The filled region partially covers the view. select Viewport : Presentation. under 3D Views.32 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. 33 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. In the Type Selector.

On the Options Bar. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. select Transparent. click Edit/New. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Lines. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . click Edit. 40 Click OK twice. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 42 Using the drawing tools. 35 Select the poche filled region.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 39 For Background. click Region Properties. for Fill Patterns. The image below shows the redrawn lines. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. 41 On the Design Bar. and click Activate View. This will make it easier to draw lines. select Concrete. 36 On the Design Bar.

for Fill Pattern. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 Click OK twice. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. 47 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Solid fill. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Edit/New. click Region Properties.43 On the Design Bar.

double-click 1st Flr. you create the final view for the analytique. under Floor Plans. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. you add it to the presentation sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown.rvt. The view opens immediately. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. then you specify the eye direction and range. Cnst. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. a cutaway perspective view.

500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 6 On the View Control Bar.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. select Silhouette Edges. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. specify the following: Under Shadow. specify 35. for Silhouette style. and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. for Name. For Sun Position. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . For Contrast. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

12 Select the section box. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 .Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Extents. select Section Box. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. A section box now cuts through the building model. Grips display on each plane of the section box. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

17 Under Model Crop Size.Presentation. select Viewport : Presentation. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 18 On the View Control Bar. select Scale (locked proportions).14 Select the crop region. In the Type Selector. under Change. enter 165 mm. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. 19 To hide the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. double-click A105 . 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. click Size. click (Hide Crop Region). Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. for Width. and click OK. under Sheets (all). clear Section Boxes. you must specify the actual size of the image. 21 In the Project Browser.

22 Click File menu ➤ Save.Presentation sheet is not the active view. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. enter Title. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . and click OK. enter Description. select the same font as the title. click Duplicate. specify a text size of 40 mm. select Text : Title.rvt. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. under Text. double-click it in the Project Browser. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 6 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify a text size of 6 mm. 10 In the Name dialog. under Text. click Edit/New. select a font. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK. click Text. Annotating the Analytique on page 503.

click Modify. 16 In the Type Selector.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. select Text : Description. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 18 On the Design Bar.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

that compose the building. and roofs. you can easily add detail with Revit components. Once the model has been imported.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. you create a small building from the front mass form. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. 507 . In this tutorial. curtain walls. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. such as walls. After you import the SketchUp model.

and click Save. click Browse. visible elements. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Click the Sketchup file. click OK.rte. select Preserve. For Colors. you create a Revit Architecture project. or select from a list. For Import units. For Layers. 10 In the Name dialog. and not in the library. enter SketchUp Model. right-click in the Design Bar. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. 2 In the New Project dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Double-click the Common folder. click OK. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . select SketchUp Files. click Create Mass. under Template file. click the Massing tab. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. For Files of type. click Training Files. 6 In the Save As dialog. enter Import SketchUp. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project.skp. select All.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. for File name. and click OK. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. select Auto-Detect. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. buildings. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. 4 In the New Project dialog. 9 In the informational dialog. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

For Place at level. 16 On the Design Bar. select Manual . The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. Level 1 is the only choice. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. click . curtain walls. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. Click Open. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. click the Close button.Center. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. In a new project. 14 On the View toolbar. such as walls. depending on the complexity of the project.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. 17 In the warning dialog. select Level 1. and roofs. ■ ■ For Positioning. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. click Finish Mass.

select the face so that it highlights in red. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. curtain walls. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. that compose the building. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. verify Basic Roof: Generic . Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. and on the View Control Bar. such as walls. and roofs. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.400mm displays.18 Proceed to the next exercise. After you create the building from the mass faces. for Level. click Roof by Face. verify Level 2 is selected. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass.

This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . To see the new roof. 9 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. on the View toolbar.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. click Create Roof. verify that Select Multiple is selected. A roof is created from the mass face. click to display masses. click Create Roof. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active.

512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Roof by Face. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 14 On the Options Bar. click Create Roof. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form.

click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . click roofs that you created. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. select Core Face: Exterior. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.15 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. 16 On the View toolbar. 23 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Type Selector.200mm displays. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. for Loc Line. verify Basic Wall: Generic . click Modify to end the command. click Wall by Face.

verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. click Curtain System by Face. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 25 On the View toolbar. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. click to view only the walls and roofs. 28 In the Type Selector.

click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 32 On the View toolbar. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. create the 2 curtain systems shown below.30 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. click Create System. 31 Using the same technique. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 .

select the other wall.35 On the Design Bar. and select it. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. click Curtain System. and on the Options Bar. 38 Select the mass face shown below. click Create System. click Wall by Face. click Roof by Face. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. click Create Roof. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. and on the Options Bar. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall.

46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . under Floor Plans. specify a point to place the camera. click to view the building that you have created. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. Below the right corner of the view. and select the mass face shown below.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. 42 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 1. click Camera. click Wall by Face. 43 Click to redisplay the masses.

The perspective view created by the camera displays. as shown.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. click your building in the view. 48 On the View toolbar. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. roofs. Click the frame to display its grips. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. to view only the walls. specify a point for the camera target. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building.

Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. Under Grid 2 Pattern. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select Center. for Justification. select Center. 50 On the Options Bar. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. click Modify. and select the left curtain system in the view. Under Grid 1 Pattern. Click OK. for Justification. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . click .

61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. click Door. under 3D Views. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.54 Select each roof to display its grips. 56 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D View 1. double-click {3D}. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. and move the roof edges as shown below. 59 On the View toolbar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and click Cancel to end the command. under 3D Views. 55 Right-click. 63 In the Type Selector. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .

64 Add doors to the building as shown below. 65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. you need to select a panel.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. Like walls.rvt. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. This affects the entire curtain system. 525 . and mullions. grid lines. To change grids. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. panel. Unlike windows. you select the grid. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. or you can use a specific curtain system command. to resize the system. For example. you need to change the length of the wall. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a curtain system using the wall command. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. and they are not windows. Like windows. To switch panel types. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. and you can change these elements individually.

5 Start the curtain system where shown. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. and double-click Ground Floor. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.1 In the Project Browser. click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector.

and double-click Southeast Isometric. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating an Entrance | 527 . expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall.

enter 1200. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels.11 Select the curtain system. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. and room bounding. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. using curtain grids. top constraint. Click OK. For Top Offset. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. top and base attachments. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. and click (Properties).

21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. Creating an Entrance | 529 . 18 In the Project Browser. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. under Floor Plans. 25 On the Design Bar. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 20 In the drawing area. right-click Elevation 1 . 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. double-click GROUND FLOOR. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. click Modify.a. click Curtain Grid. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. click Elevation.

watch the tooltips and the Status Bar.26 While pressing CTRL. THIRD FLOOR. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. and click OK. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. FOURTH FLOOR. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. click Modify. SIXTH FLOOR. and SEVENTH FLOOR. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. while pressing CTRL. one larger than the other. select SECOND FLOOR. Click to place another grid line. FIFTH FLOOR. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 33 On the Design Bar. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Click to create a vertical grid. click Curtain Grid. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. Instead of using the Door command. Creating an Entrance | 531 . click Add or Remove Segments. and on the Options Bar. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. and then select the segment above it. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. The segment line style changes to dashed. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. you add a doorway to the curtain system.Next. The two segments are removed. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel.

532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 42 Place dimensions as shown. and lock them. 39 On the Design Bar. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. click Curtain Grid. 40 On the Options Bar.38 Using the same method. select One Segment.

Do not click between the 1800 mm panels.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. click in any white space to exit the editor. Creating an Entrance | 533 . You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. Use the following image as a guide. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 43 Delete the dimensions. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid.

57 On the View Control Bar.Next. 54 On the Design Bar. The panel changes to a double door. under Elevations. click Modify. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. These panels schedule as doors. This changes the graphics style of the Next. . under Floor Plans. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. click view.rfa. 55 In the Project Browser. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. They are part of the curtain panel category. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Now. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. and click Wireframe. not as curtain panels. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 56 In the Project Browser. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. on the new curtain system you added. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 52 On the Type Selector. double-click Entrance Elevation. click Training Files.

63 Click OK twice. and the solid panels display in white. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 61 With the panel still selected. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. 65 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.60 On the Type Selector. The glazed panels display in blue. Creating an Entrance | 535 . 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click System Panel : Solid. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels.

click Save As. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .rvt. select Entire Grid Line. select Grid Line Segment. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance.68 On the File menu. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 2 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. click Mullion. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors.

10 Delete the mullions below them. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. You are going to change some mullion joins. there are a few that you do not want. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select All Empty Segments. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. so you remove them next. clickModify. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. because their width reduces the size of the doors.6 On the Options Bar. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. however.

you can also right-click.Two mullion join controls display. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 17 Save the file. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. Finally. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Click the top mullion control. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. click Modify. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. double-click Southeast Isometric. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 16 In the Project Browser.

3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. you add a curtain system using the wall command. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. Click OK. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Wall. Finally. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. Curved Curtain System | 539 . 7 On the Options Bar. enter 1200. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . 4 In the Type Selector. for Top Constraint.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. For Top Offset. (Arc passing through three points). specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. 1 In the Project Browser.

eighths. Divide the halves into quarters. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. double-click East. Next. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Elevations. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. click Curtain Grid. you place grids on the system. and then sixteenths. 14 In the Project Browser. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. You are going to use one of these snaps points.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc.

Next. 16 On the Design Bar. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. select Basic Wall: Generic . click Modify.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. you change some panels in the system. select the bottom layer of panels. to filter out all 19 Save the file. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 .300mm. 18 In the Type Selector. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise.

and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. select Glass. clear Chain. under Elevations. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 8 On the Design Bar. . click Model Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Lines. click .Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rft. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files. 6 On the Options Bar. for Depth. 3 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. 11 On the Design Bar. enter 100. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. double-click Exterior. and click . 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 12 On the Options Bar.

under Floor Plans. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall.Pattern.rfa. (SteeringWheels). and return to the project file.Pattern. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As.14 On the Design Bar. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. All fourth floor panels are selected. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 21 In the Type Selector. and click Change Walls Orientation. 24 On the View toolbar. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . click 25 On the View toolbar. click Modify. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. select Curtain Panel .Pattern. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . click (Default 3D View). 23 Right-click.rfa family. and save the family as Curtain Panel . right-click. 19 In the Project Browser.

right-click. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 27 In the Project Browser. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. select System Panel . under Floor Plans.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel.Solid. All fifth floor panels are selected. 29 In the Type Selector. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The finished arc wall should look like the following image. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. All the panels change to the solid panel. 30 Save the file.

Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. under Elevations. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Mullion. 1 In the Project Browser. and enter 50 mm for the radius. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. click Training Files. for Profile Usage. and select it. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 8 On the Design Bar.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point.rft. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. click Lines. click ■ ■ For Sides. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. Click again to specify the ending point. Select Radius. select Mullion. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For vertical mullions. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). enter 8. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. double-click East. .

click Training Files. and return to the project file. double-click Southeast Isometric. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. click Mullion. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the detail component. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. and click Visibility. 31 Click . clear Fine. After the new profile is loaded. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 13 On the Options Bar. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 27 In the Project Browser. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 28 On the View toolbar.rfa. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. click (SteeringWheels). 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rfa family.11 On the Design Bar. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Detail Component. under 3D Views. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view.rfa. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.detail. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Visibility. and click OK. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . clear Coarse and Medium. and click OK. it can be added as a mullion type. 19 On the Design Bar. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Modify.

36 Under Construction. 38 On the Options Bar. 33 Click Edit/New. for Profile. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. click Modify. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder.32 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 In the Project Browser. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . select All Empty Segments. You have placed more mullions than you want. under Floor Plans. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. so you remove the unwanted ones. 43 Press DELETE. right-click. and click OK. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 40 On the Design Bar. 44 Save the file. 37 Click OK twice. double-click GROUND FLOOR. select Circular Mullion for Family. click Duplicate.

In this lesson. click Pick Walls. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. 1 In the Project Browser.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. make custom curtain panels and mullions. All the inside faces highlight. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 4 On the Design Bar. TIP To chain select all the walls. and press TAB. a storefront system. you learned to create a curved curtain system. 5 On the Options Bar. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. double-click TOP OF ROOF. and a ruled curtain system. under Floor Plans. and then apply those custom elements to the system. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. select Defines slope. and you can click to select them all. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls.

select Entire Grid Line. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. click Modify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level.7 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 16 On the Design Bar. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. click Finish Roof. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Sloped Glazings | 549 . under 3D Views. Click OK. 11 On the View Control Bar. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. enter 600. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Roof Properties. click Mullion. 9 On the Design Bar. 18 Save the file.

double-click GROUND FLOOR. 5 On the Options Bar. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. and enter 2400. 4 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . You are going to place a storefront system in this wall.Storefront System In this exercise. click Wall. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. select Unconnected for Height. under Floor Plans.

which is specified in the type. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. To see how the grid layout is defined. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. Storefront System | 551 . 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. 10 In the Project Browser. For this wall. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Select the storefront wall. and click . The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 8 Click the temporary dimension. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. enter 10200 mm. 9 On the Design Bar. This specifies an exact length for the wall. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Modify. and press ENTER. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. click Edit/New. even if the wall height changes. under 3D Views. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing.

The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. Justification. center. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 16 Click OK. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. or end. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. see the Revit Architecture help. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. under 3D Views. you find Number. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. 1 In the Project Browser. Angle. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 19 Select a curtain grid. double-click Southeast Isometric. By setting the Angle value. and Offset. click Mullion. enter 15. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. select All Empty Segments. 20 Save the file. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. In this exercise.

4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. and highlight the model line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted.3 On the View Control Bar. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. 6 Click the highlighted line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab.

10 Select the panel. 11 Click OK. click Curtain Grid. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .8 Select the highlighted line. A panel between the 2 lines is created. click Modify. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 9 On the Design Bar. and click . Next.

and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. quarters. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. select System Panel : Solid. 18 Save the file. right-click. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. 16 In the Type Selector. embed a curtain system inside another wall. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. Finally. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. and define a ruled curtain system. quarters. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . and then eighths. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. and then eighths.

556 .

a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. gable. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. click Training Files. including hip. In this tutorial. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. shed.Roofs 15 In this lesson. and low sloped roofs. You do not need to create the work plane. you learn how to add fascia. and open Metric\m_Roofs. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. In addition. and soffits to the roofs that you create. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. In this lesson. gutters. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway.rvt. Before you can sketch the roof profile. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn to create several different types of roofs. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 557 . mansard.

and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. and so on). The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially.1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 4 Click OK. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. 5 In the Go To View dialog. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. expand Views (all). you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. click Ref Plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. select Name. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. click the blue square on the witness line. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. centerline. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof.

Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.

Next. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 16 On the View toolbar. click Lines. sketch the roof profile. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. select Chain. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 13 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections.

The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 18 Select the edge of the roof. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). expand Views (all). The roof should resemble the following illustration. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. and select the second wall. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . press CTRL. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. expand Sections (Type 1). click Modify. and double-click Section 1. Next. 19 On the Tools toolbar. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. press TAB. 21 In the Project Browser. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 17 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the exterior face of the wall. click (Join/Unjoin Roof).

562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click Attach for Top/Base. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562.24 On the Options Bar. click model. 26 On the View toolbar.

expand Views (all).rvt. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Pick Walls. 3 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. m_Roofs. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Garage Roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . and enter 600 for Overhang. and click Yes.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. sketch the roof footprint. verify that Defines slope is selected. Next. expand Floor Plans. 5 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines.

under Dimensions. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 13 On the Design Bar. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. 11 Press CTRL. Next. click the model. and on the Options Bar. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Modify. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Roof. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . By default. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 14 When you see the informational dialog. clear Defines slope. 15 On the View toolbar. select both slope definition lines. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. click (Properties).7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. The Element Properties dialog is displayed.

press TAB.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. clear Defines slope. When you complete the roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. click Pick Walls. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. and enter 600 for Overhang. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Roofs.rvt. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. expand Views (all). you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. 1 In the Project Browser. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney.

13 On the Options Bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click Finish Roof. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. click (Rectangle). select Defines Slope. select Defines Slope. add new slope lines to the roof. sketch the chimney opening. 9 Using automatic snaps. Next. click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar.6 Click to select all the walls. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 15 On the Options bar. click Lines. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the View menu. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. Next. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

m_Roofs. select Defines slope. and enter 600 for Overhang. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. expand Floor Plans. click Pick Walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . 19 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click Level 2. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.18 On the View toolbar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. using the following illustration for guidance. Next. close the roof sketch. clear Defines Slope. 11 To trim the first line segment. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 10 On the Options Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select the left vertical slope definition line. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 9 On the Tools toolbar. Next. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. click Lines. and click (Pick Lines). verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click (Trim/Extend). The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 7 On the Options Bar. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof.

click Finish Roof. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 16 On the View toolbar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 18 On the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 14 Under Constraints. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (SteeringWheels).) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Next. and click OK. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 17 On the View toolbar. click Roof Properties. click Modify. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof.

21 Click (SteeringWheels). use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 23 On the Tools toolbar. join the two remaining walls to the roof. Next. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof.

verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. Next. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. 4 On the Options Bar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. expand Views (all).Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. enter 0 for Overhang. click Pick Walls. click (Trim/Extend). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . 10 To trim the first line segment.rvt. and double-click Level 2. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. clear Defines Slope. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. and enter 300 for Overhang. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 1 In the Project Browser. select the left vertical roof line. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. 6 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Floor Plans. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 9 On the Options Bar. press TAB.

click Modify. and press ENTER.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.rvt. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 16 Under Constraints. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . (SteeringWheels). 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. expand 3D Views. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D. 13 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Roof Properties. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. select Defines slope. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 19 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all). 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. you add a slope-defining line. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click 20 On the View toolbar. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and click OK. Next. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. click Split Walls and Lines. click Slope Arrow. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Before you can add slope arrows. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. Next. click Modify. 9 On the Tools menu. Next. 5 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and double-click Level 2. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. expand Views (all). click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. click (Pick Lines). 7 On the Options Bar. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. clear Defines Slope. 11 On the Design Bar.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. add two new slope arrows. you need to add two reference planes. 14 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. and enter 600 for Offset. 12 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. To help locate the position of each split. click Ref Plane.

Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. (Properties). 16 Repeat steps 13 . 1 In the Project Browser. select Slope for Specify. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. enter 500 for Rise/1000. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 18 Press CTRL.rvt. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 3 On the Options Bar.15 to add the second slope arrow. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. When eave heights differ. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. click Edit. 20 Under Dimensions. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 23 Proceed to the next exercise.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. and double-click Garage Roof. m_Roofs. When you sketch a hip roof. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. and click 19 Under Constraints. expand Views (all). the adjacent eave heights must align. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Modify. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. select both slope arrows. and move the cursor to place the arrow. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then click OK.

select Defines Slope. 13 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Align Eaves. click Save As. 5 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. on the File menu. and click OK. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . When aligning eaves. 14 If you want to save your changes. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). and save the exercise file with a unique name. The eave lines display with a dimension. (Properties). enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. under Dimensions. 10 On the Options Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. click Finish Roof. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. Next. select a method to align the eaves.

and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Elevations. on the Options Bar. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. (Properties). you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. expand Views (all). click Modify. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Select the roof and. under Constraints. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. and double-click North. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

enter 750 mm for Rise/1000.6 On the View toolbar. click Lines. click Finish Roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (all). 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . Next. and select the remaining three lines. expand Floor Plans. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. click (Pick Lines). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. and double-click Level 3. 7 In the Project Browser. under Dimensions. and then select Defines slope. 10 On the Options Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff.

After you add the roof. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. you add a roof to a building shell. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.17 On the View toolbar. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. click Training Files.rvt. click Save As. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. click mansard roof. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. on the File menu.

verify that Defines slope is not selected. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. click Pick Walls. double-click Roof. 5 In the drawing area. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar.Because the walls are not continuous. for Type. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend).EPDM. click Roof Properties. click Finish Roof.Insulation on Metal Deck . Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . select Steel Truss . 7 On the Tools toolbar.

double-click Roof. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . under Floor Plans. click (Draw Split Lines). Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Options Bar. In the next steps. and click to select it. double-click the section head to open the section view. The roof has been created.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout.

18 Move the cursor down.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. move the cursor horizontally to the left. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. and select a point on the opposite roof line. 20 Using the same method.

The roof is now divided into 6 sections. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . Next. You modify the points individually. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. exact placement of the points is not important. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. In this exercise. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. (Add points). click (Modify Sub-Elements). you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. 23 On the Options Bar.

24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click (Modify Sub-Elements). 25 Using the same method. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. for the dimension. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. and press ENTER. enter -2''.

and on the Options Bar. including the interior edges of the roof regions. click (Properties). for Elevation.27 Press and hold CTRL. and select all of the roof edges. click Modify. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. and press ENTER. enter 4''. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . 31 Select the roof slab. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab.

gutters.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. on the File menu. The entire slab is sloped. you learn how to create roof fascia. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Gutters. and soffits in Revit Architecture. Creating Fascia. 35 Click OK 3 times. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. By making the insulation layer variable. 37 If you want to save your changes. for Structure. select Variable. click Edit. you can easily create its fascia. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. 36 View the results in the section view. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. gutters. and Soffits In this lesson. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 33 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. click Edit/New. After you create a roof. for the Thermal/Air Layer. Gutters. and soffits. Creating Fascia. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. and save the exercise file with a unique name. In some cases this type of slope is desired. click Save As. and Soffits on page 586.

3 Press CTRL. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. and click OK. and click Open. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. click Training Files. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click (Properties).rvt. 8 In the Name dialog.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise.rfa. under Construction. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter Built-up Fascia. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. and click OK twice. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. and open Common\c_Condominium.

Creating Gutters on page 588. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. c_Condominium. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs .rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 13 On the Design Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click (Properties). Creating Gutters In this exercise. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. click Modify to exit the Fascia command.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia.

12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. and click OK three times. click Duplicate. 10 Click to place the gutter. and click OK. Creating Gutters | 589 . Creating Soffits on page 590. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value field for Material. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name.3 In the Properties dialog. . under Construction. click Edit/New.

expand Views. 3 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you learn how to place a roof soffit. and double-click Roof.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Creating Soffits In this exercise. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. c_Condominium. 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Roofs.

4 Select the roof. 8 Select the roof. expand Views (all). and then select the soffit to join them. and double-click 3D. click Finish Sketch. expand 3D Views. 6 In the Project Browser. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 5 On the Design Bar. click Join Geometry. 7 On the Tools menu. Creating Soffits | 591 .

9 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Save As. on the File menu. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

select Square meters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Length. select mm. select Millimeters. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. If you are using metric units. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. For Unit Suffix. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Area. 2 In the Project Units dialog. click Project Units. 3 Under Area. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. In the final exercise. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Finally. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 593 . click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units.rvt. your values will be different. Click OK. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans.

or 0. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. Click OK. 9 Click Cancel. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. expand Floor Plans. select m2. click Settings. the system-computed height defaults to the level. it is not necessary in this exercise. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. and click Room and Area. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. 4 In the Project Units dialog. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. expand Views (all). ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. select 2 decimal places. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click the Room Calculations tab. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. click the Area Schemes tab. click OK. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. For Unit Suffix. These schemes define spatial relationships. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .

you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. you must manually add these boundary lines. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. 12 When the informational dialog displays. Click OK. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. To modify the area. forming a closed loop. you must select one of the reference lines. under Views (all). Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. click Area Plan. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. When you select Yes in this dialog. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. If you select No. click Area. 13 In the Project Browser. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. rather than the area tag. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). and store area. If you do not select this option. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Click OK. When you add area boundary lines. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. common areas. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. click Area Boundary. Next. When you pick the walls.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. click Area Plan. you can either draw them or pick them. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 21 On the Options Bar. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar.23 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ . 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. and click to select the area. click Area. 25 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . Select Office area for Area Type. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. click Modify.

click Area. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 31 On the Design Bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. click Modify and select the area. In the Element Properties dialog. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 32 On the Options Bar. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Select Office area for Area Type. Click OK. 29 On the Design Bar.■ Click OK. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ ■ . 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model.

and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. and select Store Area for Area Type. enter Core for Name. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model.■ Click OK. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . 35 Add an area to the building model core.

you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click Save. name the project Area-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and click Save. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. In this exercise. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. and click to place the legend. click Color Scheme Legend. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.Notice that within the two store areas. 37 On the File menu. In the next exercise.rvt.

3 When the dialog displays. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . select Areas (Rentable). 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. select Area Type and click Add. and click OK. under Category. 7 Under Available fields. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes.

The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .

After you make building elements. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. floor. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. and floors. and perimeter information. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. you then need to update the building face. 603 . the building model uses those element types to define the walls. In this tutorial. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. you can specify the view to display massing elements. or both. At any time. After creating mass floors. volume. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. and roofs. roofs. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. You assign the default wall. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. building elements. If you modify a massing face. curtain systems. floors.

click Create Mass. click Training Files. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. The Design Bar title changes to Mass.rvt. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. and click Massing. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. and cutting geometry. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. sweeps. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View toolbar. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. and on the Options Bar. 10 In the Materials dialog. click Lines. 12 On the Design Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 1. 16 On the Design Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . click Finish Sketch. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click 18 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. click the value for Material. select Mass (Opaque). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. for Offset. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. click Extrusion Properties. and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. (Pick Lines). and click OK.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. click Lines. for Extrusion End. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. under Materials and Finishes. and on the Options Bar. enter 1550 mm. enter 25000. and click . click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. under Floor Plans. (Line). click (Default 3D View).

for Name. and click OK. for Extrusion End. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click {3D} to see the results. and click OK. 26 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. The second form is on top of the first form.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. press TAB to highlight the entire face. click Extrusion Properties. click Finish Sketch. under Materials and Finishes. enter 27500. under Constraints. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. TIP If necessary. and click OK. under Views (all). 21 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . click the value for Material. and click . double-click West. for Extrusion Start. select Pick a plane. 30 In the drawing area. 28 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Materials dialog. enter 25000. 25 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 24 In the Element Properties dialog. select Mass (Transparent). highlight the larger form.

34 On the Options Bar. and clear Chain. (Pick Lines). click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. Next. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc.31 Click to select the face. and click to select the line start point. click Lines. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. click (Arc passing through three points). 37 On the Options Bar. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. and on the Options Bar. click (Draw).

41 On the Edit toolbar. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Edit Top. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 39 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. on the Options Bar. 45 In the Project Browser.TIP If you do not see this option. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 46 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click East. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. click (Move). Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. and delete the vertical construction line. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. (Line). click Modify. click the arrow next to the drawing options. click Lines and.

(Arc passing through three points). click Finish Sketch. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. click Blend Properties. In the next exercise. for Material. In this exercise. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. 53 On the View toolbar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. and click OK. 52 On the Design Bar. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. click 49 Create an arc as shown. 50 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). 51 In the Element Properties dialog.48 On the Options Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 .

6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. under Floor Plans. click Ref Plane. double-click Level 1. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise.rvt. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. select the mass. 4 On the Options bar. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. m_Massing_Start. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. 2 In the drawing area. click (Line). NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 7 Using the same technique. under Views (all). you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Lines. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. and select Chain. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow.

In this exercise. Using Swept Blends | 611 . on the View Control Bar. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. click (Default 3D View). 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. When sketching each extrusion. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. snap the corners to the intersections. click Finish Sketch. enter 0. for Extrusion End. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 Click OK. 14 Under Constraints. 16 On the Design Bar.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. 17 On the View toolbar. click Extrusion Properties.

■ For the radius.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select a point below the mass elements. 3 On the Design Bar. m_Massing_Start. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. and click Lines. under Floor Plans. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. click Sketch 2D Path. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. double-click Level 1. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar.

Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. The only way to align these elements is visually. 9 On the Options Bar. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. click Lines. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. click (Rectangle). click Profile 1. click Finish Path. 8 On the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends | 613 . and click Edit. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. as shown. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. 10 On the Design Bar. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. 6 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View).

click (Align). as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing .) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. 17 Using the same method. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. click Profile 2. 15 On the Design Bar. click Finish Profile. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. and press ESC.13 On the Tools toolbar.

click <By Category>.18 On the Design Bar. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Profile. click Finish Swept Blend. 21 In the Materials dialog. and click . under Materials and Finishes. 23 On the Design Bar. click Swept Blend Properties. Using Swept Blends | 615 . 22 Click OK twice. select Mass (Transparent).

24 On the Design Bar. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. click Finish Mass. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. Finally. you create new family types from a mass family file. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . In this exercise. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements.rvt.

click New. enter 12000 mm. for Width. and click Apply. enter 11000 mm.rfa. for Depth. and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog. enter 46000mm. 7 Click New. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . for Depth. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. enter 15000mm. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. 5 Click New. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 8 For Width. for Height. 3 In the Name dialog. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. and for Name. and click OK. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. In this exercise. enter 9000 mm. 6 For Width.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. for Depth. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. enter 18000 mm. for Height. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. under Other. click Family Types. enter 68000 mm. and for Name. and click OK. click Training Files. and click Apply. enter 18000 mm. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 6000 mm. for Height. 9 Click OK.rfa.

7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Arc Dome. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. click Training Files. 8 In the Type Selector. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. double-click Site.rfa. and Triangle.rvt. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 2 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise.rfa. Semi Barrel Vault. as shown. 6 Open the Box-Training. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 If not already selected. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. on the View toolbar. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. under Views (all). You also load other existing mass families and place them. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. (Show Mass) to show the massing model.rfa family files. click Place Mass.rfa. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar.

and click OK twice. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select the triangle. and click to place the mass. 24 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. select Rotate after placement. click (Element Properties). specify Mass (Opaque). 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. click Place Mass. 20 In the Type Selector. click Modify. for the Material parameter. 14 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. select the 3 boxes. and click (Element Properties). 17 Press CTRL. enter 90 for Angle. 11 Select the box. and on the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . 23 On the Options Bar. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. for the Material parameter. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area.10 On the Design Bar. 25 In the drawing area. click Modify. specify Mass (Transparent). and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 21 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Place Mass. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Place Mass. 29 In the Type Selector. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). and click (Element Properties). and click OK twice. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . 32 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Mass (Transparent). 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). 27 In the Element Properties dialog.26 Select the triangle. for the Material parameter. specify Mass (Opaque). for the Material parameter. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. and click OK twice. 33 On the View toolbar. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm.

Joining Mass Elements | 621 . Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. In the next exercise. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. you join these mass elements. NOTE When you join geometry.rvt file. click (Default 3D View). you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. (Join Geometry). In this exercise.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise.

6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. on the Edit toolbar. 4 Select the triangle.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. under Views (all). 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . click (Mirror). Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. under Floor Plans. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Site.

11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first.8 On the Options Bar. (Join Geometry). 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. click (Draw). 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. and then select the triangle. as shown. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. for Axis. Joining Mass Elements | 623 . click (Default 3D View). enter SM. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 17 Press ESC to see the result. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally.

and select the triangle mass element. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. do not clear the check mark. 2 On the Window menu. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. (If Design Options is already selected.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. click Modify.rvt. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. click (Add to Design Option Set). click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. 1 On the Design Bar. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. you joined mass elements together.In this exercise. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options.

13 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. click Place Mass. 5 In the Project Browser. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. and click OK. 14 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). select Rotate after placement. click Place Mass.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). and click (Element Properties). 7 In the Type Selector. 17 In the Type Selector. clear Curved. for Angle. under Floor Plans. 10 On the Options Bar. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. for the Material parameter. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. double-click Site. select Sloped (primary). select the 2 semi barrel vaults. click Modify. enter 90. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown.

19 On the Design Bar. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. under Elevations. under Views (all). and click (Element Properties). click Modify. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. and click OK twice. 23 On the View Control Bar. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . specify Mass (Transparent). 22 In the Project Browser. While pressing CTRL. 20 In the drawing area. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. for the Material parameter. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. click (Add to Design Option Set). 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. under Views (all). select the three arc domes. and watch the status bar. double-click North. 28 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. select Curved. under 3D Views. TIP To find the correct shapes. clear Sloped. double-click {3D}. and click OK. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown.

Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . 33 In the Design Options dialog. 31 Click the value for Design Option. select Curved from the Design Option menu. click (Design Options). click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. and click Close. under Option. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. select Curved and. click the Design Options tab. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. 35 On the File menu. In this exercise. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. you placed mass elements into Design Options.rvt. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. and click OK. you can make it the primary option. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 34 Close the warning that displays.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Make Primary.

under Views (all). and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. click Training Files. you pick massing faces to create walls. click (Pick Faces). click Wall by Face. 1 In the Project Browser. and for Loc Line. select Wall Centerline. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. double-click {3D}. 6 On the Options Bar.Brick on CMU.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. 2 On the View toolbar.rvt. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 5 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Exterior .

11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 5. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 16 In the Type Selector.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. 9 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 14 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. click Wall by Face. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . 8 In the Project Browser. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. double-click Level 3. under Floor Plans. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. double-click Level 1. 15 On the Design Bar. under Views (all).

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. under Floor Plans. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. 20 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 9.18 Select all the faces shown in red. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 21 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). you can select the overlapping curtain wall. If desired. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. click Wall by Face. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing .

The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. 3 On the Model Categories tab. When you select levels. under Views (all). click Mass Floors. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog.rvt. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. click Modify. double-click {3D}. 6 On the Options Bar. perimeter. 8 On the Design Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . clear Curtain Panels. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. and click OK. 4 Click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. select all levels. and Walls. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. and exterior surface area. volume. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Curtain Systems.In this exercise.

632 | Chapter 17 Massing . 11 On the Options Bar.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 10 Press CTRL. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. select Levels 1-4. 13 On the Design Bar. click Mass Floors. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. click Modify. and click OK.

17 In the Mass Floors dialog. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . click Mass Floors. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). select Level 1. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. and click OK.14 On the Options Bar. 15 Press CTRL. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. 16 On the Options Bar.

and click Add.rvt. Floor Volume. select Mass Floor. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order).In this exercise. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. under Category. and click OK. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. 4 Using the same method. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. press and hold SHIFT. under Available fields. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. schedules can be created using the mass floors. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. The Floor Area. and select Level. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. select Floor Area. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . Floor Perimeter. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model.

and click OK. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. enter Retail. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Mass: Family and Type. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. for Sort by. for Usage. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected.

expand Schedules/Quantities. After you assign usage. under Other. under Scheduled fields (in order). the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 13 With Usage selected. and click Remove. and click Properties.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Fields. click Edit. 14 Select Level. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. select Mass: Family and Type. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing .

click Edit. 24 In the Project Browser. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. under Other. under Other. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. and select Grand totals. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. select Usage. under Fields. for Filter. for Filter. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. and click OK. 18 On the Filter tab. in the field under Filter by. 23 In the Rename View dialog. and click Properties. for Filter by. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and plan views. select Floor Area. 16 On the Formatting tab. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. select Usage. for Then by. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and in the field below. and click OK. and click Rename. select Level. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Field formatting. 22 In the Project Browser. enter Hotel. 19 Click OK twice. elevation. 27 Click OK twice. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). 25 In the Element Properties dialog. for Sort by. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. select Calculate totals. click Edit. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 .

floor perimeter. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. the floor area. under Views (all). Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. by level. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . The mass floor schedules list. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. double-click {3D}.In this exercise. you created mass floor schedules. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click Roof by Face. you pick massing faces to create roofs.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.

Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. 5 On the Options Bar.4 In the Type Selector. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. select Basic Roof : Generic . This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. click Create Roof. Your model should now look as shown. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. click Create Roof. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family.400mm.

create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 13 Using the same method. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. and Walls. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected.8 Using the method you just learned. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. select Sloped Glazing. click Create Roof. select Curtain Panels. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. Curtain Systems. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. in the Type Selector. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 12 On the Options Bar. In this exercise.

and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 3 In the Type Selector.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. 5 Press CTRL. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . click Curtain System by Face. double-click {3D}. click Create System. under Views (all). verify that Select Multiple is selected. 1 In the Project Browser. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 6 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. select the blended form on the in-place mass. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing .7 Using the same method.

create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. click Create System.9 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method.

you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. you change the size of an existing mass family.12 Click Modify to exit the command. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise.rvt. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing .

click Visibility/Graphics.1 In the Project Browser. Roofs. and then click OK. Floors. clear Curtain Panels. 2 On the View menu. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. Next. click Modify. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 6 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. enter 30000. for Width. and Walls. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . Curtain Systems. clear Exclude Design Options. under Views (all). and click OK. double-click Site. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 12 On the View Control Bar. In the next steps. 11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. under Views (all). 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click Level 1.

click OK. click Remake. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. 14 On the Options Bar. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. Also. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. you want to select the smaller one.TIP To select the curtain wall. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . click (Default 3D View). 16 On the View toolbar. 17 Select the roof as shown.

click Remake. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing . 19 Select the arc dome curtain system. and click Remake.18 On the Options Bar.

In this exercise. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 1 Open the 3D view. under Schedules/Quantities. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements.20 In the Project Browser. you changed the size of an existing mass family. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements.

Massing only. 4 Rename the view 3D . 7 Clear one of the check boxes.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. click All to select all categories. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. right-click {3D}. 6 On the Model Categories tab. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 3 In the Project Browser. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. under 3D Views. 9 Select Mass.

You might create the model shown. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. to the building shell. If desired. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 .In this exercise. such as columns and an extruded roof. This concludes the massing tutorial. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model.

652 .

653 . By grouping objects. and modify repetitive units. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. After you create a model group. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. In another exercise. and typical office layouts. the host group is also updated automatically. you not only simplify their placement. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. you add the new model group to a previously created group. Modifying. In this exercise. The new group is considered nested within the host group. hotel rooms. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you also simplify the modification process. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. all instances in the building model are updated. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. You can also nest groups within other groups. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. place. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. When you make changes to a nested group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. In this tutorial. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. Creating. or with those working on a different project. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. For example. You mirror one instance of the group.

rvt. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. 2 Click in the drawing area. and double-click First Floor. expand Floor Plans. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. expand Views (all). and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. click Training Files. enter ZR. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.

The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. click (Group). and click OK.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . enter Typical Kitchen.

7 On the Design Bar.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. select the center control for the group origin. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Modify.

expand Model. click Modify. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. right-click Typical Kitchen. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. and click Create Instance. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. under Groups.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser.

The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.14 On the Edit toolbar. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . clear Copy. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. click (Mirror). 15 On the Options Bar.

17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. and on the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . click (Rotate). 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.

21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. click Modify. as shown. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. and one rotated.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. 20 On the Design Bar. one mirrored.

name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. press TAB to highlight the wall. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.rvt. you make changes to an instance of a group.rvt. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Modifying a Group In this exercise. When you finish editing. and click to select it. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Modifying a Group | 661 .Save the training file 22 On the File menu. click Save As. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click Save.

press TAB.). click Modify. and click to select the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. 4 Move the cursor over the door. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the wall. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. 8 On the Design Bar. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 7 Click (Group Member.).3 Click (Group Member. press TAB. NOTE To display an excluded element. and click member to group instance.).).

13 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm.127mm. select Basic Wall : Generic . and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Door. move the cursor to the left. 15 On the Options Bar. clear Tag on Placement. click Modify. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. 14 In the Type Selector. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. Modifying a Group | 663 . 12 On the Design Bar.

select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner.17 On the Design Bar. In edit group mode. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 21 On the Options Bar. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Edit Group. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. click Modify. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. move the cursor up. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 23 In the drawing area.

for Unconnected Height. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. Nesting Groups | 665 . The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 29 On the group editor toolbar. created in an earlier lesson. enter 2134. you add the Typical Kitchen group. click Finish. 26 Select the opening. (Element Properties). under Constraints. and click OK.25 On the Design Bar. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. Nesting Groups In this exercise. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 1000. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. which acts as the host. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. click 28 For Base Offset.

rvt.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Edit Group. 5 In the drawing area. double-click First Floor. in the Project Browser. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. under Floor Plans. select the Typical Kitchen group. 4 On the group editor toolbar. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click (Add to Group).

under Floor Plans.6 Press TAB. Nesting Groups | 667 . click Finish. select the wall between the folding doors. 7 On the group editor toolbar. 8 In the Project Browser. and each of the bifold doors. double-click Second Floor. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group.

668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. you add door tags to a group. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. under Floor Plans. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. such as text.rvt. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. such as door and window tags. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. and filled regions. In the next exercise. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. double-click First Floor.

7 On the Design Bar.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to draw a rectangular region. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click Finish Sketch. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. 4 On the Options Bar. and select a point below the left elevator. click Filled Region.

16 In the drawing area. click (Group). 12 Enter Tile. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. click Modify. as shown. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. and select the text note and the filled region. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click to add an arc leader. and on the Design Bar. and click OK. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 14 On the Edit toolbar. click Text. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 9 On the Options Bar.

Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Groups.18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. Because the detail group contains variables. click Modify. 20 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and click Create Instance. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. expand Detail. double-click Second Floor. 21 In the drawing area.

m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. clear Leader. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. double-click First Floor. 5 On the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Floor Plans. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area.rvt. click Modify. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. 3 On the Options Bar. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group.manner that a drawing component can be added.

expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. click (Group). and click OK. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. under Floor Plans. 9 On the Edit toolbar. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. click Check None. for Attached Detail Group Name. click (Filter Selection).7 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Second Floor. select Door Tags. 8 In the Filter dialog. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. and click OK.

Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. click Modify. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . When you load the group from the library into a new project. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. therefore. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. 14 On the Options Bar. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click OK. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click Place Detail. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 16 On the Design Bar.

accept the default template file. verify that Same as group name is selected. and click OK. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. click Modify. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. browse to the Desktop. In this case. under Groups\Model. and click Save. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . A warning dialog displays. 3 For File name. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. click Desktop. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 5 In the New Project dialog. and expand Model.rvt. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. select 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. expand Groups. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. and click Open. and click Save Group. verify that Project is selected. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. 12 On the Design Bar. for Create new.

expand Revit Links. 24 In the message dialog. click Training Files. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. select the linked Revit model. click Remove Link. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 20 On the Options Bar. When a group is converted to a link. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Link. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click OK. and on the Options Bar. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 17 On the Design Bar. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. click Bind. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click Use Existing. click Modify. and the link is removed. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog.

677 . you add a building pad to the site. islands. In the final exercises. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface.Site 19 In this tutorial. Using Site Tools In this lesson. You add property lines manually. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. convert the data to a table. and walkways. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. and then modify the data.

The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. right-click in the Design Bar. you create a toposurface using two different methods. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. and open Metric\m_First_Project. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. 3 On the Design Bar.rvt. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Site. click Toposurface. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. and double-click Site. expand Views (all). 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. In the second part of this exercise. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. expand Floor Plans. Using the first method. 4 On the Options Bar. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. click Point. This project file was created using the default metric template.

7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . Use the following illustration as a reference.

under Increment. enter 1500mm. click Site Settings. Use the following illustration as a reference. 12000mm. 11 On the Design Bar. under Additional Contours. and click OK. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. 12 On the Settings menu. click Finish Surface. and 18000mm absolute elevations. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm.8 On the Options Bar. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 15000mm. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points.

16 On the View toolbar. on the Standard toolbar. and press ENTER. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . 14 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View). Before importing the contour data. and double-click South. click to view it at various angles. 15 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). click to delete it. click Modify. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). enter 1000mm. modify the level names and elevations. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. 19 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. click the elevation value.

and press ENTER. click Training Files. 24 In the Project Browser. click Modify. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. double-click Site. rename the level Basement. click Yes. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. under Floor Plans. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. under Views (all). select Specify. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . 29 Select the imported topography. rename the level Base Site Elevation. Click Open. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. 28 On the Design Bar. select Preserve. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and click OK. Verify that Current view only is not selected. click Pin Position. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. and press ENTER. Until it is exploded. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. For Colors. 23 Click the Level 1 text.21 Click the Level 2 text. it is considered an import symbol. For Layers. 30 On the Edit menu.

select it. When you select the import symbol. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. click Modify. 32 On the View menu. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. clear C_INDX.31 On the Design Bar. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. and then click OK. 34 Under Visibility. and click OK. 36 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. clear Elevations. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. click the Annotation Categories tab. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . click Toposurface. click Visibility/Graphics. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. when the edges highlight.

you add property lines using two methods. 39 On the Design Bar. Using the second method.rvt. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. this project file is required in its current state. click Finish Surface. 42 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. Adding Property Lines on page 684. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. click (Default 3D View). 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click (SteeringWheels). and click Save. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. Using the first method.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 40 On the View toolbar. name the project Site-in progress.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Create property lines by sketching. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Property Lines | 685 . double-click Site. Select and delete the right vertical line. do so before continuing. click Lines. 4 On the Design Bar. click Lines. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first.rvt. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. click Property Line.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. and click OK. Site-in progress. On the Design Bar. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. under Floor Plans. Click Modify. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. If you have not completed the previous exercise.

click OK. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. to delete them. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . and click OK. click Property Line. 8 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. when they highlight. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. A warning dialog is displayed. on the Standard toolbar. click Finish Sketch. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. select Edit Table. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. click 12 On the Design Bar. select the lines. 9 In the warning dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. click OK. add an arc line on the right.

click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 15 Starting in Row #1.14 In the Property Lines dialog. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. Adding Property Lines | 687 . 19 In the Tags dialog. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. If the gap is not closed. 16 Click OK. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. This means there is no gap in the property lines. click to place the property lines. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference.

this project file is required in its current state. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click Drafting. 23 On the View menu. Before adding property line segment tags. click Tag ➤ By Category. In the final step. In the next exercise. you created two sets of property lines. The tags display more prominently in this view. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. right-click in the Design Bar. 25 Under Visibility. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography.20 Click Load. click Visibility/Graphics. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to place it. click the Imported Categories tab. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 30 On the View Control Bar. click Training Files. clear Leader. 22 In the Tags dialog. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog.dwg and click OK. and click OK. you loaded and tagged the property line segments.rfa. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. In this exercise. 27 On the Options Bar. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments.

select Working Contour. click New. click Object Styles. Under Subcategory.0mm. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . click Site Settings. for Subcategory. Under Range Type. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. Site-in progress.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. select a shade of Brown.rvt. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. 2 On the Settings menu. select Dash dot. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. 7 Click OK. enter 1000. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Under Line Pattern. and click OK. 10 Under Additional Contours. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. In the Object Styles dialog. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. enter the name Working Contour. select Topography. under Contour Line Display. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. select Single Value. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Under Line Color.

Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. Working Contour. In the next exercise. and islands. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. The object style subcategory. you create subregions in order to define roads. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. such as material. parking areas. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise.11 Click OK. The next exercise requires a new training file. parking areas. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. and islands. you create topographic subregions to define roads. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide.rvt. Although the exact dimensions are not important. try to replicate the location and proportion. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. 2 On the Design Bar. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Site. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. click Subregion. click Lines. click Training Files. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 .

Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.Tarmacadam for Name. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. select Site . under Materials and Finishes. click Properties. 6 In the Materials dialog. under Identity Data. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. enter Parking for Name. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . 8 On the Design Bar. and click to open the Materials dialog.NOTE In the Metric training file. When you finish the sketch in a later step. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. click the value for Material. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. 14 On the Options Bar. and double-click Topography Schedule. As you create new subregions. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each.Tarmacadam. 12 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . they display within this schedule. click Edit Boundary. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions.9 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

Delete overlapping lines. 22 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. click Lines. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 18 In the Project Browser. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. In this training project. double-click Topography Schedule. 16 On the Design Bar. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. Notice that the project area has increased.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. 20 On the View Control Bar. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. Within each subregion. click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. click Subregion. double-click Site. 17 On the View Control Bar. 694 | Chapter 19 Site .

and click OK. 30 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. under Schedules/Quantities. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 26 In the Materials dialog. click Properties.Grass for Name. click the value for Material. double-click Topography Schedule. 29 On the View Control Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 .23 In the upper-right parking area. enter Island . use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. select Site . under Identity Data. 24 On the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. and click to open the Materials dialog.Grass for Name. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 28 On the Design Bar.

and apply the material Site . double-click Topography Schedule. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. double-click Site. double-click Site. 34 On the Design Bar.Grass.31 In the Project Browser. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. Notice that the schedule has been updated. Name each region Island Grass. click Lines. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . 696 | Chapter 19 Site . 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration.walkway. 32 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. You must sketch each region separately. 35 On the Design Bar. Name the subregion Walkway. under Schedules/Quantities. under Floor Plans. click Subregion.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . click Finish Sketch.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. there is still only one toposurface. double-click Topography Schedule. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. 37 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. Notice that the schedule has been updated. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 38 In the Project Browser.

40 Navigate to your preferred folder. this project file is required in its current state. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. When you use the grading tool. Site tutorial-in progress. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. 698 | Chapter 19 Site .rvt. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Select the toposurface. and click Save. double-click Site. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. name the project Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser.

RELATED For more information regarding phasing. 5 On the Design Bar.3 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. and click OK. Using Phasing on page 761. 8 Select the topographic surface. select Existing for Phase Created. see the tutorial. click Graded Region. and click Select and Edit. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. select Copy Internal Points. 6 On the Design Bar. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. under Phasing. A warning dialog is displayed. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. click Modify.

10 Press DELETE.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 700 | Chapter 19 Site . The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.

Grading the Toposurface | 701 . and new.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. demolished. 11 On the View Control Bar. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

click Point. click (Default 3D View). Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 17 On the Design Bar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 15 On the Options Bar. click Finish Surface. 18 On the View toolbar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway.13 Press DELETE. 19 On the View Control Bar.

20 On the View toolbar. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. you create a building pad. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. and delete it. and click OK. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . and click OK. click View Properties. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Therefore. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. (SteeringWheels). 23 Select the toposurface. you can delete it. When you add a building pad. under Phasing. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. 24 On the View menu. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. click View Properties. Only the graded topography displays. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. under Phasing. specify Existing for Phase. click to view it at various angles. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. only the original toposurface displays. this project file is required in its current state. specify New Construction for Phase.

NOTE By default. Site tutorial-in progress. double-click Site. the Pick Walls command is active. If you have an existing building model. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. under Floor Plans. 6 On the Design Bar. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. click Finish Sketch. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Pad. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 4 On the Design Bar. click Lines.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View Control Bar.rvt.

this project file is required in its current state. 7 On the View Control Bar. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Notice the new building pad. click (SteeringWheels). Adding a Building Pad | 705 . 8 On the View toolbar. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Adding Site Components on page 706. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. click (Default 3D View). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 9 On the View toolbar. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572.

click Parking Component. click Modify. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Design Bar. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. Site tutorial-in progress. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area.Adding Site Components In this exercise. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm .90 deg. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . under Floor Plans. double-click Site.rvt. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. and select the parking space. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. Adding Site Components | 707 . 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. click (Default 3D View).NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 8 On the View toolbar. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.

and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.9 On the View toolbar. choose any tree type. Notice the new parking spaces. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . click (SteeringWheels). click Site Component. 12 In the Type Selector.

the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration. click (SteeringWheels).13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Default 3D View). 15 On the View toolbar. 14 On the View toolbar. Adding Site Components | 709 . Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

click Hidden Line. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. click Apply. click Tag All Not Tagged. double-click Site. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. 5 On the View menu. and click OK. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . and click Apply.rvt. Site tutorial-in progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees.

Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. Click up and to the left. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. The exact position of the dimensions is not important.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. Click again to the left to position the leader. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . to position the shoulder of the leader. as shown: 10 Using the same method. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. In the following exercise. outside of the site. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces.

■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. and select the 3 spot dimensions. click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . 12 Press and hold CTRL.

■ Clear Leader. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. you create a parking schedule. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 On the Design Bar. this project file is required in its current state. click Modify. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial.

click Tile. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . and under Heading. select Mark. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. 5 Under Available fields. 8 Under Fields. double-click Site. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. enter Size. 7 Under Fields. and click Add. 13 In the Parking Schedule. under Space. 9 On the Window menu. select Type. select Mark. click the Fields tab. The parking schedule is displayed. 12 In the Site plan. 10 In the Project Browser. Site tutorial-in progress. 6 Click the Formatting tab. select Type. and under Heading.rvt. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. select Parking for Category. and click OK. number the first three spaces consecutively. and click Add. 4 Under Available fields. under Floor Plans.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Close Hidden Windows. under Views (all). If necessary. and click OK. enter Space. 11 On the Window menu. click Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog.

Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. under Space. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . 14 In the Parking Schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule.

716 .

After the project is shared. use Element Borrowing. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. however. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. When you are working on a shared project. In this tutorial. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. stairs. they cannot make changes to it. Working in a shared project In a shared project. You can enable Worksharing for any project. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. floors. and click Editable. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. All other team members can view this workset. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. To make a workset editable. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. such as walls. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. called Worksharing. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. you can select which worksets are open or closed. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. Using Worksharing. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. such as annotations and dimensions. and so on. A workset is a collection of building elements. Elements specific to a view. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. doors. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. This prevents possible conflicts within the project.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. The first time you activate worksets within a project. you specify an active workset. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . go to the Worksets dialog. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. select the desired workset. you must first enable Worksharing.

You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. and View worksets. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application.dialog. for a typical project. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. not including the Project Standards. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Experience has shown that. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. Shared Levels and Grids. Instead. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. such as a tenant interior. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. When setting up Worksharing. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. In a multi-story structure. In the lessons and exercises that follow. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. You should have at least one workset for each person. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. In most projects. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. In the next exercise. After learning the fundamentals.

Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. As new members create worksets for their own use. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. designers work in teams. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. each team member has control over a portion of the design. On this tab. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Regardless of the default setting. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. When you create a new workset. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. When creating the new worksets. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . with each assigned a specific functional task. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. For example. if a workset named Interior was created. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Team member roles Typically.

As you work. the file is saved as the central file. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. When finished or at regular intervals. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. However. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. This is called “Selective Open. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you can select which workset is active. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. your changes propagate to the entire team. When you save to the central file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. within the local file. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. This makes them available to other team members. your changes are saved. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. After saving to the central file. On the Options Bar. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you should then save to your local file. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. When you save locally (to your local file).Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. proceeds as usual. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you make that workset editable by you. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. Therefore. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. however. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. Generally. When you save to the central file. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them.

When working remotely. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. In the next exercise. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. save to the central file. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. In this conceptual exercise. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. make any required worksets editable. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. and make that workset editable. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. and then save the local file. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you should check out the Materials workset. for instance. To do this. In this situation. if you know who checked out the required workset. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. you work no differently then you would in the office. reload the latest changes from the central file. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. Alternatively. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. using VPN. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. In this instance. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file.

When you enable worksharing. click Training Files. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. and notice all are editable by you. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. The Worksets dialog displays. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. click Worksets. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Your username displays as the present owner. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and open Common\c_Worksets. under Show. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File.rvt. 3 In the Worksets dialog.

Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. clear Visible by default in all views. 17 On the Options Bar. imagine four users including yourself. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. it is better to make them visible by default. under Identity Data. click New. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. For training purposes. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Therefore. 9 Click New. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. 13 In the Rename dialog. Project Standards. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. and click OK. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. type the name Exterior Shell. another is assigned the interior layout. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. For example. and double-click Level 1. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. expand Floor Plans. In this simple training project. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. In this training file. In this case. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. expand Views (all). 14 In the Worksets dialog. and Views. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. currently named Workset1. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Because the interior walls appear in many views.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. When you initially activate Worksharing. a small number of team members are working on the building model. ■ 5 Under Show. clear Families. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. Only User-Created worksets should display. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. however. select Workset1. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. You do. 8 Click OK. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. 12 Click Rename. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. click . you can rename the default workset. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 16 In the drawing area. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view.

29 Click OK. Hold Shift down to deselect an element.19 Click OK. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. stairs. click . TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . under Identity Data. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Select one of the interior walls. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. 26 On the View menu. including the interior doors. click the Worksets tab. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and walls. under Identity Data. 23 Select all of the interior elements. and click OK. select Interior Layout for Workset. 24 On the Options Bar. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. and click OK. 21 On the Options Bar. select Interior Layout for Workset. click Visibility/Graphics. click .

This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 42 On the right side of the dialog. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. Now that you have created the central file. and click OK. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. click Save As. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 39 Click Save. 35 On the Options Bar. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 30 On the View menu. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. click the Worksets tab. 41 In the Worksets dialog. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. under Floor Plans. 32 Select Interior Layout. click . 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. under Identity Data. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 34 In the drawing area. 38 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. If any interior elements remain. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. 33 In the Project Browser. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. click Close. under Views (all). select Interior Layout for Workset. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. click Visibility/Graphics. 43 Click OK. In this exercise. click Worksets. double-click Level 2. 44 On the File menu. click Non Editable. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 .

Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. please do so before continuing. 2 In the Open dialog. 15 In the Project Browser. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. You have created a local file which is for your use only. any referenced workset is opened but hidden.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. check out worksets. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. make modifications to the building model. select all the User-Created worksets. and select Yes for Editable. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. and click OK. click Worksets. 6 On the File menu. click Save As. select the central file. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. expand Floor Plans. In this case. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. you create your local file. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. click Options. click Open. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. select Interior Layout for Name. Next. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 7 In the Save As dialog. 12 Click OK. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. select Interior Layout. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. 13 On the Window menu. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. If you have not yet completed the exercise. and click Save. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 4 Click Open. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Before working on the model. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. In addition. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and select Specify. 11 In the Worksets dialog. expand Views (all). 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive.

you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. however. click . click . 21 On the Options Bar. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. On the Options Bar. Because this element is not owned by another user. under Identity Data. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. notice the Editable Only option.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. 20 Under Constraints. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. If it was owned by another user. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. click Worksets. In the Worksets dialog. In this case. If this is selected. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 18 On the Options Bar. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 22 Click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 Click OK. and click OK. click Modify. Verify that it is cleared. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . you can still edit this wall. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 23 On the File menu.

26 Delete the door. select Basic Wall: Interior . click Wall. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm.126mm Partition (2-hr). 34 In the Type Selector. 31 On the Design Bar. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. The precise location is not important. click Door.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. click Modify. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 29 In the Type Selector. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. When working in your local file. By default. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. two users access the central file through a network connection. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. save to central. At the end of a work session. If you have not yet completed these exercises. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. checked out worksets. a tooltip. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. you should perform regular saves. leave this file open in its current state. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. Borrowed Elements is selected. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. make elements editable. You modified the building model. In addition. which matches the information in the Status Bar. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. In this particular case. For training purposes. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. In this exercise. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. it is recommended. you created your local file. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. and save locally immediately afterward. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . please do so before continuing. displays the workset as well as the element type. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. add two door openings into the rooms you created. Throughout the process. you should relinquish all worksets. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. each user must check out worksets. click Save to Central. Whenever you save. and reload the latest changes.

enter User 2. 7 In the Open dialog. specifically sequenced. consider that person to be User 1. and select Yes for Editable. click Open. select all the User-Created worksets. In the following section of this exercise. 3 On the Settings menu. This is a system setting. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. skip the following section. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. For training purposes. and click OK. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). under Username. 9 Click Open. You now have a local copy of the project. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. and reset the Username to your computer login name.rvt. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. and click Save. 11 On the File menu. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and select Specify. click Worksets. User 2: Create a local file. and proceed to Creating a local copy. click Options. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. 15 On the File menu. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. and click OK. click Save As. In addition. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. 4 Click the General Tab and. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and click OK. one user has already created a local file. select the central file. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. 12 In the Save As dialog. This file is for your use only. click Options. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. return to the Settings dialog. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. instructions are staggered. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu.

User 1: Check out worksets. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. expand Floor Plans. it becomes the active workset. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open.You are now the owner of that workset. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1.” 29 Click OK. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Save to Central. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. expand Floor Plans. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. select the lower exterior wall. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. 24 In the Project Browser. 19 On the File menu. If it is not open. and double-click Level 1. and select Yes for Editable. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. 23 Click OK. modify the building model. 17 Click OK. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . open it now. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. If you only have one workset checked out. expand Views (all). 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. 27 On the File menu. click Worksets.

enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. under Floor Plans. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. The changes User 2 made are apparent. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. 43 In the Project Browser. 33 On the File menu. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. Click Yes. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows.” 35 Click OK. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. you should create a furniture plan view. under Floor Plans. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. 42 Select Furniture Layout. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. click Save to Central. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 37 On the File menu. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 44 In the Project Browser. 41 On the File menu. click Reload Latest. right-click Copy of Level 1. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 46 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. right-click Level 1. and click OK. and click OK. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. click Worksets. Before adding any furniture. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. User 1: Reload latest worksets. click Save to Central. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 45 In the Rename View dialog.” 39 Click OK. However. select Yes for Editable. When you save to central.

51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 49 On the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. click Component.” 55 Click OK. click Rename. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. click Edit/New. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. click Worksets. 65 Click OK. and click OK. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. select Project Standards. and click Element Properties. and click inside any room. 48 In the Type Selector. 62 On the File menu. are placed under Project Standards. click Save to Central. the Visible by default option was not selected. 61 Click OK 2 times. enter Exterior Wall . 66 On the File menu. and click OK. click Modify. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. click Reload Latest. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. rather than Families. 60 In the Rename dialog. Therefore. 50 On the View menu. 63 In the Worksets dialog. such as Wall Types. 53 On the File menu. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu.200mm. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. under Show. NOTE System families.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. choose any desk. click Save to Central. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. click the Worksets tab.

two users are working on the same project with separate local files. 3 In the Save As dialog. Each user checked out worksets. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. In subsequent steps. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. In the final exercise of this tutorial. select Save to Central. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and still have your local files open. click Options. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. leave this file open in its current state. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. click Save As. 70 On the File menu. Each user must have network access to the central file. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. and click OK. you save the training file as a central file. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. Checking out worksets. and published their changes back to the central file. select the following. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. There are specific instructions for each user. finished the previous workset exercises. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. This exercise requires two users and. At the appropriate point in this exercise. modified the building model. As each of you work. and these problems are rectified. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). click Training Files. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Reload Latest. User 1: Reload latest. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. and save 69 On the File menu. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. leave this file open in its current state. throughout this training. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. you need to set up your central and local files. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC).

User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. Set the Username to User 2. 15 Click Open. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 6 On the File menu. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 .4 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK. 12 On the File menu. click Save As. This is a system setting. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. select the central file. click Options. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and click OK. and reset the Username to your computer login name. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. and select Specify. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. click Options. click Save As. and click OK. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 18 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. click Open. and click OK. return to the Settings dialog. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 13 In the Open dialog. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. You have created a local file which is for your use only. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. and click Save. This is the local file for User 1. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 5 Click Save. select Make this a Central File after save. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 17 On the File menu. and click Save. Next. 8 In the Save As dialog. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. In addition. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Options. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. The central file should still be open. On the Settings menu. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1.

User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. and then click OK. You are now the owner of that workset. and click Open. and click Editing Requests. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. 27 Under Active Workset. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. select them. and then click OK. and select Yes for Editable. 26 In the Worksets dialog. 22 In the Worksets dialog. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. and select Yes for Editable.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. At this point. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. select the second window from the top. Afterwards. click Worksets. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. click the File menu. double-click Level 1. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . verify that Editable Only is cleared. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. select Interior Layout. You are now the owner of that workset. 29 On the Options Bar. select Exterior Shell. 30 On the left exterior wall. 24 Under Active Workset. click Worksets. After you submit the request. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. select the Interior Layout workset. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. if any User-Created worksets are not open. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence.

In this case. 36 Click Close. select the following. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . and click OK. click Check Now. select the request submitted by User 2. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. to Local.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. A message informs you that your request has been granted. In this multi-user exercise. 38 Click OK. you requested permission to edit the element. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. and notice the window is in the new location. and close 39 On the File menu. and the other user granted it. click Close. select Save to Central. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. 35 Click Grant.

738 .

Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. In addition. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. you can have multiple sets of design options. and each option set can have multiple schemes. In this particular case. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). The client has asked you to create various options. 739 . After you and the client agree on the final design. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. In this tutorial. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. For example. Using design options. At any time in the design process. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set.

and delete the unwanted options from the project. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. therefore. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option.In the first exercise in this lesson. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. the only available command is to create a new option set. click Training Files. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). each is constructed for interchangeability. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system.rvt. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. you design each of the structural options. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. under Option Set. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Close. With the second option. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. make your final design decision. click New. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. After you create a design option. click Edit Selected. each with multiple design options. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the second exercise. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. the roof and structure systems must work together. TIP In this exercise. you set up multiple design option sets. you can edit it. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In the final exercise of this lesson. 2 In the Design Options dialog.

make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. TIP To center the middle column. and the third column centered between the two. 11 On the Edit toolbar. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. In the following illustration. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. click Modify. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process.4 In the Project Browser. In this case. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. click Column. 9 On the Design Bar. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. By selecting Multiple. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. or add a dimension string between the columns. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. 5 On the View menu. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. click 12 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. select: ■ ■ ■ . add three columns.

add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. click . 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. A copy of the three selected columns is added. Because of the size of the columns. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . they are difficult to see in this view. When you are finished.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. using the same technique. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 17 Zoom out and. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 18 On the View toolbar.

The first click specifies the beam start point. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. Zoom in on the upper right column. click Beam. select Round Bar : 50mm. Next. 23 On the Design Bar. In it. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. Use the following illustration as a guide. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . you add the beams that span the columns. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. and click at its center to set the beam start point. Adding a beam is a two-click process. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. click Modify. The second click specifies the end of the beam. under Floor Plans. double-click TOP OF CORE. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 21 In the Type Selector. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 19 In the Project Browser.Notice the 12 columns that you added.

28 Zoom out. click 26 On the Options Bar. select: ■ ■ ■ . and select the center of the column to add a copy. and click the center point. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. click . move down to the next set of columns. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch.25 On the Edit toolbar. 30 On the View toolbar. zoom into the left column. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

click New. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary).Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. under Option. under Option. and click OK. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. under Option. enter Beam for New. There should now be two roofing design options. 38 In the Rename dialog. select Option 1 (primary). click New. 34 In the Design Options dialog. under Option Set. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. and click OK. click Rename. 33 Click Finish Editing. 32 In the Design Options dialog. name the option Louvers. and click OK. 36 In the Rename dialog. enter Structure for New. 37 Select Option 2 and. and click OK. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. click Rename. under Option Set. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. click Rename. 40 In the Rename dialog. enter Roofing for New. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and click OK. 46 Under Option. not a new option set. enter Brackets for New. 43 In the Rename dialog. 45 Under Roofing. click New. under Option. 41 Under Option Set. click Rename.

Under Now Editing. 51 Under Edit. name the option Sunscreen. 53 In the Project Browser. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. When finished. double-click ROOF TERRACE. under Floor Plans. 48 Under Option. under Structure. select Edit Selected. it will resemble the following illustration. and click OK. This allows you to more easily manage the project. select Option 2. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 50 In the Design Options dialog. click Rename. you create the second design option.47 Under Roofing. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . select Beam. 52 Click Close.

click Component. click Align. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. Refer to the following illustration. 58 On the Tools menu. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 56 In the Type Selector.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . select M_Roof Beam. The second click represents the plane that is moved.

60 After aligning the beam. 62 Select the beam and. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. on the Edit toolbar. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 61 On the Design Bar. click Modify. The first click sets the move start point. The second click represents the move end point. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. Click to indicate the end point of the move.

You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. click . 68 In the Design Options dialog.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam.rvt. 66 On the View toolbar. 67 On the Tools menu. 70 On the File menu. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . and click Save. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. name the file. Notice that even before you close the dialog. m_Urban_House-in progress. click Finish Editing. click Save As. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. which is visible by default. you need this file in its current state. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. 69 Click Close.

select Louvers (primary). click Edit Selected. delete them after the rafter is in place. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 8 In the Type Selector. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. expand Floor Plans. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Under Now Editing. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. The first option. you design each of the roofing options. you set up multiple design option sets. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system.rvt. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 3 In the Design Options dialog. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. under Roofing.In this exercise. The second roofing system. do so now. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. 6 In the Project Browser. 10 Referring to the following illustration. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. With the second option. 4 Under Edit. Sunscreen. click Component. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. and double-click TOP OF CORE. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. If you need to add dimensions. a Louver system. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. expand Views (all). Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. 5 Click Close. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. open it now. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. the other for beams. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. each with multiple design options to pick from. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . In the next exercise. 2 On the Tools menu. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span.

click Modify. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 .11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select Constrain. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. click . Enter 5 for Number. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. 16 On the Options Bar. under Other. enter 11750 mm for Length. click Array. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. and click OK. Select 2nd for Move To. 15 On the Edit menu. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. 12 Select the rafter you added previously.

18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. and press ENTER. enter 990. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . when the listening dimension displays.

and select the louver you just placed. enter 5475 mm for Length. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 For the array starting point. click the Edit menu. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. click Component. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 25 With the louver still selected. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. Select 2nd for Move To. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . click Modify. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. and click OK. Select Constrain. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click . Enter 34 for Number. and click Array. 26 On the Options Bar. under Other.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar.

28 Move the cursor vertically downward. and press Enter. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and. enter 300. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. 29 On the View toolbar. click . when the listening dimension displays.

click Finish Editing. and double-click West. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. 31 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. 33 Under Editing. Therefore. expand Elevations. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Edit Selected. 40 On the Options Bar. select Sunscreen. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. 39 On the Design Bar. click . Click OK. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . and then click Close. click Lines. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. 30 On the Tools menu. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 34 In the Project Browser. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Edit. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. In this case. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name.The louver roof system is complete. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. under Roofing.

Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. click Properties. You will fix this in a later step. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. 46 On the Tools menu. click Trim/Extend. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . then you can modify it through the dimension. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 43 On the Design Bar. and the third point defines the arc. 49 On the View toolbar. Select the right arc. the top of the next column on the right. then the center arc. Under Constraints. 45 Click OK. 41 Select the top of the left column. 48 On the Design Bar. The arcs should connect. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. click Finish Sketch. click . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. The first two points define the ends of the line. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. Under Constraints. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. The roof sketch must be a continuous line.

50 On the Tools menu. The first option. under Edit. under 3D Views. 52 On the File menu. Managing Design Options | 757 . You have completed the sunscreen roof system. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. and click Rename. make it part of the building model. and click OK. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. secondary. The second roofing system. you designed each of the roofing options. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. and last options. In this exercise. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. tertiary. 51 In the Design Options dialog. and click Duplicate. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. do so now. Managing Design Options In this exercise. expand 3D Views. click Save. After exploring the combinations. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. 4 In the Project Browser. Sunscreen. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. right-click {3D}. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise.The louver roof system is complete. and delete the discarded design options. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. a Louver system. and then click Close. under Views (all). under Views (all). you select a design. you need this file in its current state. click Finish Editing. enter Primary Option. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations.

Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible.5 Right-click each of the copies. 9 Click OK. under 3D Views. 10 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Secondary Option. and click OK. 11 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. and click Rename. 7 On the View menu. double-click Primary Option. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). Notice that both option sets are set to automatic.

click the Design Options tab. 15 On the View menu. double-click Last Option. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 18 In the Project Browser. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In your design options. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. In this case. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Tertiary Option. Managing Design Options | 759 . the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. under 3D Views. 19 On the View menu. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. under Views (all). and click OK. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. and click OK. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. under Views (all). At this point.14 In the Project Browser.

delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. click Yes. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. made it part of the building model. 30 Under Option Set. double-click Primary Option. click Close. 26 Under Option Set. The set is deleted. the beam option becomes part of the model. 25 Select Structure. 23 In the Design Options dialog. 35 On the File menu. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. In this exercise. An alert is displayed. click Delete to remove the views that used options. click Delete. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 29 Select Roofing. select Beam. 31 In the alert dialog. click Yes. and deleted the discarded design options. select Make Primary. 27 In the alert dialog. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. the current primaries are no longer options. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 24 Under Option.22 On the Tools menu. click Accept Primary. under Structure. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. since you no longer need them. After exploring the combinations. Because the client has selected the design option. you selected a design. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . This was the client choice for structural. click Save.

complete with schedules. In the lesson and exercises that follow. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. In the second exercise. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. This changes room definition and total building model area. You create new phases. demolish existing walls and doors. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. then add new walls and doors in a different location. In the second exercise. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. demolish existing construction. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new phases. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. and then add new building model elements. 761 .Project Phasing 22 In any project. For the client.

notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. This means that all building model elements. under Phasing. go to the Settings menu. under Phasing. expand Views (all). During the demolition and renovation process. you do not need to change the project units to metric. define the units. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. and open Common\c_Phasing. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. click Modify. 7 Click Cancel.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. regardless of phase. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. expand Floor Plans. are visible in this view. and double-click Level 1. click (Element Properties). 6 On the Options Bar. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. When you create a new project. 4 Click Cancel. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. If you wish to do so. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. click Project Units. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. As you add new elements to the building model. In the Element Properties dialog. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. and click OK. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

right-click Level 1. for Phase Created. select Existing. and click OK. enter Level 1 . Because this is a phase-specific view. After you release the mouse button. under Floor Plans. click Modify. right-click Copy of Level 1 . You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. 17 Click No. 14 On the Design Bar. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views.Existing. under Phasing. 12 On the Options Bar.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. including the door tags. After you create the views. Phasing Your Model | 763 . Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. Because this is a renovation project. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. click (Filter Selection). 16 In the Rename dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. clear Door Tags. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. and click Rename. 11 In the Filter dialog. 20 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. click . 10 On the Options Bar. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. TIP If this were a multi-story building. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. right-click Level 1 . are highlighted in red. enter Level 1 . all of the building model elements. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.Demo.Existing.Existing. under Floor Plans. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. 18 In the Project Browser.

double-click Level 1 . and Temporary. 29 For Composite Plan. Existing. Next. double-click Level 1 . 27 Click New. to which all the building model elements belong. 28 Under Filter Name. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Phase status is time-dependent. under New. you modify these settings. 24 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. There are five default phase filters. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. select Overridden.Demo. enter Composite Plan.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition.Existing. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. under Phasing. You may need to zoom in to see this. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. and click OK. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. select Existing. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. for Phase. Demolished. 26 In the Phasing dialog. click the Phase Filters tab. Later in this exercise. Because of this time relationship. On a logical time line. however. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. new construction occurs after existing construction. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. In this case.

select a lighter blue. As you click each wall. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. click (Demolish). 36 Using the same method.Existing. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. you begin demolition. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. 39 In the Phasing dialog. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog.31 Under Phase Status. under Floor Plans. select the interior walls one at a time. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. Phasing Your Model | 765 . specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. double-click Level 1 . select Demolished. under Cut ➤ Lines. There are two ways to demolish an element. 32 In the Demolished row. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. Next. select the line style. click the value for Color. click OK. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. double-click Level 1 . 42 In the Project Browser. or you can use the demolish tool.Demo. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. 34 In the Color dialog. 35 Click OK twice. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. you demolish all elements hosted by it. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. under Floor Plans. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. select red. When you demolish the host. its display changes to a red dashed line.

766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . under Phasing. and click OK. for Phase Filter. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter.Existing. 47 In the Type Selector. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 49 On the Design Bar. 50 In the Type Selector. and click OK.Demo. click Wall. for Phase Filter. click Door. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 53 Open Level 1 . 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 51 Add a door leading into each room. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. The demolished walls no longer display.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). add a long horizontal wall. 52 Open Level 1 . Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. under Phasing. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Show Previous + New. select Basic Wall: Interior .

New. 62 If necessary. regardless of phase.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. right-click Level 1 . spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter.Demo. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . 60 On the View toolbar. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. new is shown in blue. Phasing Your Model | 767 . The renovated building model plan is displayed. All elements are displayed in this view. and existing shows as half-tone. because the phase filter is set to Show All. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.New. 59 Open Level 1 . click (Default 3D View). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. which are displayed as red. 57 In the Project Browser. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. 61 On the View Control Bar.

NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. 63 Close the file. you can do so at this time. sizes. define the units. you do not need to change the project units to metric. demolition. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. 2 Open Level 1 . and click OK.Existing.Demo. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. and new construction. 3 Open Level 1 . you can see the new walls added to the building model. If you wish to save this file.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. therefore. click Project Units. As the renovation process continues. expand Views (all). 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . the rooms change in both definition and size. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. expand Floor Plans. click Training Files. All room boundaries are phase-specific. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added.New. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. go to the Settings menu. Notice that this view is the original building model. You can also see that the room quantities. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. In the next exercise. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. In this view. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. and double-click Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. If you wish to do so. In this view. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial.

Existing. 13 Open Level 1 . 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 6 Open Level 1 . Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . 11 On the Design Bar. click Room. In the Phasing dialog.New. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. and maximize the view. Use the following illustration as a guide. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. click Modify. 5 Click OK. yet they have different room numbers. 9 On the Design Bar. click Room. click Room Tag. 10 Open Level 1 . click in each room as you move to the right. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Demo. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide.

In this exercise. 17 On the Window menu. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. click Close Hidden Windows. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. and double-click Room Schedule . expand Schedules/Quantities. click Tile. 18 Open Room Schedule . In this case. The two schedule views tile. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. 19 On the Window menu.New Construction.Existing. 20 Close the file. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. In addition. View phase-specific room schedules. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. 16 In the Project Browser. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Notice that in each phase-specific schedule.15 Using the following illustration as a guide.

and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. In these situations. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. performance. In this tutorial. This maximizes efficiency. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. You position the building models on the site plan. In the final lesson. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. Comparison of alternatives on a site. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. and manage the links throughout the project. modify their visibility. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. 771 .

you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. One building model is a condominium. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. You link two building models to the project. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. modify their visibility.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model.Linking Building Models In this lesson. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You position the building models on the site. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. and the other is a townhouse. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry.

4 On the File menu. Otherwise.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. click Open. click Open. This option is grayed out. and click Properties. click Save As. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. Manual .By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates.rvt. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. RELATED See the lesson. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. click Training Files. with write permission. you can do so. this option will place the link at a predefined location. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. 5 On the File menu. and click OK. and open Common\c_Site. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. Click Open. All three files now reside. and save the file there. ■ ■ Manual .Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. Auto . in the Model Linking folder that you created. click Close. 2 On the File menu. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. c_Townhouse. 8 Clear Read-only. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. right-click. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. c_Condo_Complex.■ Auto . however. Select c_Site. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . select the three files. this system is not exposed to the user.

For Positioning.Origin to Origin. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. If you wish to do so.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. select Auto . expand Views (all). you do not need to change the project units to metric. and double-click Level 1. 13 Click Open. 11 On the File menu. expand Floor Plans. Notice the blue detail lines. 10 In the Project Browser. click Project Units. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. you can go to the Settings menu. and make your changes. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Import/Link ➤ Revit.

The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. 15 On the Edit toolbar. The linked model moves as one object. The first click specifies the move start point. Standard move commands work with linked building models. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. 16 For the move start point. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. click (Move).rvt displays in the Type Selector. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. The Move command requires two clicks. After you select it. 17 For the move endpoint. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. The second click specifies the move endpoint.

select Auto . 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.Origin to Origin. 21 Click Open. For Positioning. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. and select c_Townhouse. 18 On the View menu.After you specify the location to move to.

In this case. click to specify the rotation start point. and click to specify the end of the rotation. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . when the vertical line displays. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. you first specify the rotation start point. click (Rotate). Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. To rotate an object. 23 On the Edit toolbar. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise.

Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. click (Move).The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model.

click (Copy). and the second click specifies the copy-to point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . The first click specifies the start point. The Copy command works much like the Move command. 30 For the starting point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar.

click (Default 3D View). 37 On the View toolbar. enter Townhouse A. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Rotate. for Name. 32 On the Edit menu. 34 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. and click OK. 35 In the Element Properties dialog.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. under Identity data. click . if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. use the Move command to make any adjustments. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse.

In this exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. click (SteeringWheels). NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels.38 On the File menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. they were placed too low within the site topography. When you originally linked the files. After linking the files. do so before continuing. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. In the next exercise. click and hold Orbit. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. 2 On the SteeringWheels. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . If you have not completed the previous exercise. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. In this exercise. click Save.

5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view.rvt. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. 7 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. In this case. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. expand Elevations. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. and click to select the line. 3 In the Project Browser. when it highlights. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. you first select the plane you want to align to. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and double-click South. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. When using the Align command. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. and then select the plane that you want to align. under Views (all). and click OK. and click to select it. Click the Revit Links tab. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. To do this. In the steps that follow. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. click 13 On the View toolbar. double-click North. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. click (Default 3D View). 12 On the View toolbar. under Elevations. click Save. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the model. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . click and hold Orbit. (SteeringWheels). Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. 9 In the Project Browser. 11 Return to the South elevation view. 14 On the SteeringWheels. 15 On the File menu. Both townhouses should be at the proper level.

detail level. select <Custom>. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project.rvt. click Visibility/Graphics. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. or Custom. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you can independently control the visibility settings. expand c_Townhouse. In the next exercise. 9 Under Visibility. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. display settings. under Elevations. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. scroll down and clear Levels. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If the Basics page is set to Custom. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click OK. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click By Host View. By linked view. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. As you can see. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. 4 Under Visibility. 2 On the View menu.rvt. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this exercise. double-click South. you need this project file open and in this view. do so before continuing. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. and the halftone settings for each linked project. click the Revit Links tab. 10 Click OK. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. When you link a file. 8 For Annotation Categories. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. click Custom. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. no detail level changes are required. click By Host View. You can click the value for Detail Level. 14 On the View menu.rvt. Using the Custom option. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select <Custom>. In this case. 24 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Revit Links tab.rvt. on the Basics tab. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. select Custom. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 20 For c_Townhouse. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . and click OK. 16 Under Visibility. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. With linked files. and then set the detail level to coarse.rvt. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. expand c_Townhouse. click the Revit Links tab. or fine. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 23 In the Model categories list. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. medium. under Display Settings. By default. By selecting custom under Model Categories. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser.

where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. there are situations. and phase filter of a specific link. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range.rvt. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . on a sloped site for instance. By default. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. In this exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. 25 On the Revit Links tab. In this case. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click OK. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. select c_Townhouse. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. 29 Click OK. All other components are grayed out. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. In the next exercise. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. all new. phase. 31 On the File menu. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. In this case. click Custom for the Townhouse link. click Save. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. this is preferable. 26 Under Display Settings. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. under Visibility. demolished. With the Show All filter applied. However. 28 Select By linked view for View range. In most cases. you manage the linked files. existing. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects.

and Saved Path fields are read only. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. You learn more about this in the next lesson. 5 Click Unload. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 6 At the confirmation prompt. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. the link is maintained. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. do so before continuing. 4 Under Linked File. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. 7 Click OK. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. click Yes. click the Revit tab. 3 Under Path Type. select c_Condo_Complex. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. Locations Not Saved.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. They supply information regarding the links. click Manage Links. In general. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified.rvt. In a shared coordinate environment. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . Notice the Loaded. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. The default path type is Relative. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it.

Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. 9 On the File menu. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. To do this. However. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. If you choose not to open that workset. In the Import/Link RVT dialog.rvt. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. click Save As. expand Revit Links. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. In these cases. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. the link is not loaded. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In general. and select Specify. and click Reload. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. right-click c_Condo_Complex. click the arrow next to the Open button. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. When you initially place the link. 8 In the Project Browser.

and save it as an RVT file. In essence. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog.10 In the Save As dialog. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. name the file Site_Project. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. When you share coordinates between projects. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. do so before continuing. leave the project file open in its current view. you are establishing a shared origin point. If you have not completed the previous lesson. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. When used in conjunction with model linking. In the next lesson. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. The host file consists primarily of site components. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. In this exercise. and the resulting project files. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise.

When you are working in the host project. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. If you have not completed the lesson.rvt and click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. click Open. Select Site_Project. Linking Building Models on page 772. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . open it before continuing. do so before continuing. click the Condo Complex. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. 2 On the Tools menu. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. In this case. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files.coordinates are used. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. As indicated in the Status Bar. 3 In the drawing area. and the resulting project files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. If you have closed the project. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project.

4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. this location is not saved outside of the host project. but can have multiple additional locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. 5 On the Design Bar. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. and click OK. Lot B. do so before continuing. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . you need this project file open and in this view. even though both models originate from one linked file. These three locations can be named Lot A. If you have not completed the exercise. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. when the edges highlight. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. On the Status Bar. it is placed at a specific location. select Location 1. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. click to select it. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. However. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. In this exercise. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. and Lot C.

select Move instance to. click . and click OK. 9 In the Select Location dialog. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. Record the current position as a location. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. enter Lot A for New. click Not Shared for Shared Location. In the Choose Location dialog. under Instance Parameters. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. click Change. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. click Not Shared for Shared Location. . 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. When constraining a link to a location. under Instance Parameters. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. 4 Under Value. click Reconcile. This is a one-time operation. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Rename dialog. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. 12 On the Options Bar. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. click Rename. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. click OK. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once.2 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.

27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. and click OK. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. This is a two-click process. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. a warning displays. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. you cannot redefine its location. Save locations 21 On the File menu. and click OK. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. 26 Click OK. or cancel the action. select the second option. click the Revit tab. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. 23 Click Save Locations. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. Notice the OK button is still not active. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. select Save. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. 30 On the Tools menu. By relocating a project. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. 16 Click Change. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. The first click specifies the move start point. click Manage Links. When you release the mouse button. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click OK. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. Because Lot A is currently in use. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. click Duplicate. enter Lot B for Name. make sure Lot B is selected. and click OK. Record current position as. and then select the townhouse project.Notice the OK button is not active. and the left townhouse resides at that location. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. click OK. When you relocate a project. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. When you create a location. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 In the Select Location dialog. ignore the warning. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. To explicitly save a location. The second click specifies the move endpoint. the active location position is moved.

36 On the File menu. 33 On the Edit menu. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. 34 On the File menu. NOTE In the following exercise. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. click Save. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. select Save. click Close.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. and click OK. In this exercise. you work in one of the linked projects. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. click Undo to return the origin to its original position.

3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. 2 On the File menu. Select c_Condo_Complex.rvt file. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model.By Shared Coordinates. Because this building model only has one named location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. For Positioning. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. double-click 1st Floor. When opening the linked file. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. Also. If you have not completed the exercises. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. Click Open. In addition. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 .rvt file. In this exercise. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. under Floor Plans. The current active location is Lot A. select Auto . the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. if other models were linked into the same host. click Open. it is placed automatically within the host project. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. do so before continuing.

click View Properties. click Duplicate. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. In this exercise. In this exercise.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. 6 Select Lot B. you create a new location. 7 Click OK. you need this project file open and in this view. and click OK. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. click Manage Place and Locations. select True North for Orientation. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. If you have not completed the exercises. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. In the host file. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. under Graphics. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. orient a view to true north. and click OK. enter Lot C. do so before continuing. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. 3 In the Name dialog. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. In the next exercise. you can select Lot C if necessary. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click OK. and click Make Current. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. you manage the shared locations. click Manage Place and Locations.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. In this exercise.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. click Open. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. On the Options Bar. If you have not completed the exercise. do so before continuing. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. 10 On the File menu.rvt and click Open. Select Site_Project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. You can save the file if you wish. click Close. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

and click OK. click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. and click Add. under Category.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Count. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. select Doors.

and then click OK twice. click Close. In this exercise. 12 Select Grand totals. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping.8 Click OK. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. 13 On the File menu. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. clear Itemize every instance. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. 14 On the File menu. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. under Other. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . expand Schedules/Quantities. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. click Save. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. You have completed this tutorial. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. select Family and Type for Sort by. right-click Door Schedule. and click Properties.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

journal cleanup options. 803 . Finally. click the value for Selection color. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. selection default options. under Template file. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. and click OK. and set it as your default template. Notice that the drawing area is black. click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 3 In the Options dialog. click the Graphics tab. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 6 In the New Project dialog. you modify the system environment. In the second lesson. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. which is independent of the project settings. 11 Under Colors. they are not saved to project files or template files. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. 4 Under Colors. 10 In the Options dialog.rte. you create an office template. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. and your username when using worksets. click Training Files. select Invert background color. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. click the Graphics tab. click Browse. These settings control the graphics. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 8 In the New Project dialog. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. notification preferences. In the first lesson.

select red. and open Metric\m_Settings. clear Invert background color. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. the elements causing the error display using this color. 18 On the Design Bar. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. For Tooltip assistance. and select the wall. When an error occurs. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. 13 Click the General tab. and click OK. 15 Click OK. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. select One hour. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 In the Options dialog. select yellow. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. click Training Files. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Wall. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 14 Under Notifications. click the Graphics tab. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. click Modify. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select None. However. click No. 22 When prompted to save changes. Notice that the system settings apply to this project.12 In the Color dialog. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Selection color.

However. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Under Username. you specify default file locations. do not save the changes. notice the list of library names. Under Journal File Cleanup. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. 7 In the Options dialog. and click Open. such as in a large. family template files. click Browse. you can start a new project with that template. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. 2 In the Options dialog. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. If prompted. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). click Browse.27 Click the General tab. 10 In the Places dialog. 4 Click Cancel. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click the File Locations tab. TIP To view a template. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. This path is set automatically during the installation process. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. 3 Under Default template file. select Normal. and click Browse to select a template. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. click Browse. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Specifying File Locations on page 805. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. select the folder to save your files to by default. including your default project template. under Default path for family template files. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. 5 Under Default path for user files. select your preferred Save reminder interval. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. centralized. and family libraries. For Tooltip assistance. 8 Click Cancel. These files are used in the software support process. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . click Places. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. Your login name displays by default.

11 In the Places dialog. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click Open. and Import dialogs. and change the name to My Library. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. under Libraries.library names and path. Load. When you are opening. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. templates. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and select it as the library path. and you can create new libraries. In the following illustration. Save. saving. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. and click the icon side of the field. click (Add Value). or loading a Revit Architecture file. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. or families. TIP You may want to create a new folder first.

such as bump maps. 5 In the text editor. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 19 Click Cancel. click My Library. click the My Library icon. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. If you want to relocate this path. scroll down the list of building industry terms. and Import dialogs. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 21 Click the File Locations tab. (Remove Value) to delete the library. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 24 Click 25 Click OK. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. This path is determined during installation. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 28 Click OK. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. click Edit. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 2 In the Options dialog. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Edit. custom color files. 22 Click Places. and click OK twice. Load. and decal image files. 15 Under Library Name. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. Save. click the Spelling tab. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 23 Select My Library. view the current path. If you work in a large office. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. specify the new location here. 9 In the text editor. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 3 Under Settings.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open.

12 On the Standard toolbar. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. you modify snap increments. click Text. click OK. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. delete sheetmtl-CU. 22 In the text editor. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Browse. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. do not save the changes.rte. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 23 In the Options dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click OK. 4 In the New Project dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. You can turn snap settings on and off. click File menu ➤ Save. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 21 In the text editor. click default template. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click Edit. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Restore Defaults. If prompted. As you zoom in and out within a view. In this exercise. 19 Under Settings. 20 Under Personal dictionary. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. under Template file.11 In the Options dialog. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Modify. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click the Spelling tab. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you modify snap settings. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. work with snapping turned off. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 18 In the Options dialog. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project.

click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . and move the cursor to the right.. For example. clear Chain. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. such as ZO to zoom out. While sketching. TIP To zoom while sketching. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 8 In the Snaps dialog. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . After you click to place the object at the midpoint. If it does not. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. enter SM. click OK. If you do not have a wheel button. 7 Under Object Snaps. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. zoom out until it does so. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 10 On the Options Bar. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. and enter 500 .6 Under Dimension Snaps. use the wheel button on your mouse. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. click Wall.

This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. click Modify. and specify the wall endpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 21 Move the cursor downward. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. Do not set the wall end point. and the wall edges. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. If you move the cursor along the wall. and delete the value 500 . When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. and click Wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. This is the increment that you added previously. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. and move the cursor to the right. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 24 Click OK. the midpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. 18 Enter SM. Notice that snapping is once again active. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and do not save the file. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps..

save the project file with a unique name.rvt. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . and use it to complete the remaining exercises.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. In the steps that follow. annotations. and open Metric\m_Settings. and object styles. Using these options. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. fill patterns. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You create and modify materials. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. When you apply a material to an element. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. you render a region to observe the changes. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. lines. Finally.

Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. 11 Click OK.Fieldstone. and click (Element Properties). The properties describe the color. scale. Masonry . and click OK. 3 Click (Duplicate). In the next exercise. read-only library for render appearances. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . 13 Select the lower exterior wall. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. In the Materials dialog.Fieldstone material. When you change properties of a render appearance. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . for Class. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.Fieldstone. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. and click OK. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. The Render Appearance Library is a local. 9 Click Apply. These details will display in rendered images. However. and select Masonry . enter Masonry . 8 Select Riverstone Blue. 6 Click Replace. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. and texture of the material. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. In the steps that follow. this material provides a starting point for the new material. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. select Stone. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. When a model element is loaded into a project.Stone. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 10 Click the Graphics tab. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. 2 Scroll down the materials list. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. and double-click 02 Entry Level. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project.

23 While pressing CTRL. select Masonry . Fieldstone on CMU. 15 Click Duplicate.Fieldstone.Brick. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 21 Click OK three times. click This is the material that you created. 22 Select the left exterior wall. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style. . and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. select the rear exterior wall. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 26 On the View Control Bar. click Edit/New. and click OK. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 18 For Finish 1. click in the Material field. 20 In the Materials dialog. 17 For Structure. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . 19 On the right side of the Material field. 16 Enter the new wall name. click (Default 3D View). Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . click Edit. 25 On the View toolbar. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU.Fieldstone.14 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Type Selector.

This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. select Low or Medium. 31 In the Rendering dialog. 32 In the Rendering dialog. select Region. select the render region (a red rectangle). 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Rendering Dialog. The rendering process begins. for Setting. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. click Render. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. When finished. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. under Quality. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. In the following exercise. right-click the Design Bar. 29 In the 3D view. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. 28 In the Rendering dialog. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. and click Rendering. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick.

2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. click Show the model. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. in the Rendering dialog. 33 In the Rendering dialog. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. 3 Under Pattern Type. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. m_Settings-in progress. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. and clear Region. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. select Custom. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. click Show the model. Zoom into the model. 5 Click New.rvt. Then click Render again. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 7 Under Custom. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form.rvt. expand Elevations. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. and double-click West. click Import. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Drafting pattern density is fixed. choose Model. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. such as steel.

(Element Properties). for Finish 1. under Pattern Type. click to select a fill pattern.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. click 15 For Structure. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog.56. click . 13 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern.Fieldstone material. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. click OK. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . click in the Material field. select Model. and click OK. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. select fldstn. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Edit/New. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. 9 Under Custom. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry .Fieldstone. enter Fieldstone. 11 Click OK. and for Import scale. 21 In the Materials dialog. click Modify. click Edit. 22 Click OK three times. 18 Under Surface Pattern. In the Materials dialog. enter . 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. and click OK. 10 For Name. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. 23 On the Design Bar.pat.

Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. you can set the window frame material to By Category. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. m_Settings-in progress.25 On the View toolbar. TIP If the pattern does not display. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. click (Default 3D View). NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. adjust your zoom settings as needed. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . 2 On the keyboard. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. there are often multiple window types within a project. expand 3D Views. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. and double-click 3 Windows. For example.

click in the Value column. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Edit/New. under Materials and Finishes. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. . under Materials and Finishes. 14 In the Materials dialog. 8 In the Materials dialog. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. and click . 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. 11 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. click (Element Properties). for Trim Exterior Material. 5 On the Options Bar. click in the Value column. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click By Category (located under the materials list). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). click Modify. and click 15 Click OK twice. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click By Category. 9 Click OK twice. 16 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the arched window.3 On the View Control Bar. for Trim Exterior Material.

Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Name. . 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. 23 Click Replace. enter Trim . 29 In the Materials dialog. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . click OK. for Class. or keywords include the word red. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. select Paint. expand Windows. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. type red. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. and click OK. descriptions. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. When you render a 3D view. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. click OK.red paint. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. (Duplicate). 25 In the search field. click in the Material column. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. 18 On the Model Objects tab. and click OK. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. and select Trim. select Trim. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. 19 For Trim. 28 Under Shading.

4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. under Category. Now that you have created a line pattern.rvt. m_Settings-in progress. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. select Roof Line. select Roofs. 7 On the View Control Bar. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. enter Roof Line.31 On the View toolbar.rvt. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. is open with the 3D view active. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. m_Settings-in progress. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. (Default 3D view). 11 For Line Pattern. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click New. select Red. 10 For Line Color. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Use object styles to apply the change to all views. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. for Name. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof.

12 Click OK. Notice that the line color displays in this view. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . but not the line pattern. under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style. double-click to Building. 14 On the View Control Bar. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. 13 In the Project Browser.

18 For Line Color. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select Solid. select Blue. elevations. under Category. for Visibility.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. select Roofs. 19 For Line Pattern. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. 22 On the Model Categories tab. Plans. For Pattern. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click 03 Roof. For Color. 15 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select 5. click Override. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. select Roofs. select Black. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. 20 Click OK. select Roof Line. sections.

select Level: 02 Entry Level. click New. 31 Click OK. This places the line above the topography. under Modify Subcategories. 29 For Name. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.25 Click OK twice. For Line Pattern. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. select Zoning Setback. (Line). select Double dash. enter Zoning Setback. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 33 In the Type Selector. select Red. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. 34 On the Options Bar. Notice the site topography and the property lines. For Line Color. Click Click (Draw). click Lines. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. select 2. specify the following: ■ For Plane. and click OK. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 .

double-click 02 Entry Level. expand Lines. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 44 On the View toolbar. and clear Property Lines. under Floor Plans. NOTE If Site is not selected.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and clear Zoning Setback. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 36 On the View toolbar. and then clear Property Lines. select it. (Default 3D View). This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 43 Click OK. Modifying Annotations on page 825. 40 In the Project Browser. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 39 Click OK. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. 38 On the Model Categories tab. and clear Zoning Setback. Expand Site. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. click (Default 3D View). Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view.

m_Settings-in progress. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear.rvt. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. click another wall. select Linear . is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Imperial and click OK. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. for Units Format. and place a dimension on the floor plan. 10 On the Standard toolbar. 7 Click OK twice. For Units. To place a dimension.rvt.Imperial. You have created a new dimension style. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. Modifying Annotations | 825 . you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. click Modify. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Type Selector. click the default value. double-click 02 Entry Level. and then click outside the second wall.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. 4 Enter the name Linear . 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. click one wall. 5 Under Text. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. click Duplicate. (Undo). select Feet and fractional inches. m_Settings-in progress.

14 On the Options Bar. under Category.rfa. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click M_Window Tag . 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. click (Element Properties). This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . Then press Delete. click Tag All Not Tagged. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. 18 In the Tags dialog. click the bottom window. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 27 On the west wall. In the preview image. 28 On the Design Bar. In the steps that follow.Number is now the assigned tag. 23 Click OK. 26 On the Options Bar. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project.Number as the assigned tag. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag .Number.Number. 21 In the Tags dialog. Leave M_Window Tag . clear Leader. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. 22 Under Loaded Tags. 24 While pressing CTRL. notice that the label displays 1i. 16 Click Cancel. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 19 Click Load. scroll down to Windows. select the 3 window tags. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. click Training Files.

32 On the View toolbar. for Length. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. M_Window Tag . In the second section. m_Settings-in progress.Number. In the final section. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. click Modify. (Default 3D View). For Unit symbol. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. you specify the project units of measurements. Specifying Units of Measurement.Temporary Dimensions. In the first section. dimensions use these project settings. and click OK. 31 On the Design Bar. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. click the default value. 2 In the Project Units dialog. select 0 decimal places. 6 Click OK.Temporary Dimensions. 9 Under Doors and Windows. and Detail Level Options on page 827. Click OK. dimension values display using this setting. Unless overridden. Unless overridden. notice Window Tags appears twice. for Rounding. verify that Create is clear. 3 In the Format dialog. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. select Openings. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. select To the nearest 100. select meters squared. and click OK. 30 Under Leader. and Detail Level Options | 827 .rvt. click the default value. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. select Faces. Temporary Dimensions.Under Category. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Specifying Units of Measurement. 8 Under Walls. the other displays the instance value. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. Specifying Units of Measurement. and click OK. you modify the detail level assignments. you modify the temporary dimension settings. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. for Area.

Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. expand Floor Plans. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. 12 Click OK. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. click . expand Views (all). temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. When you create a new view and specify its view scale.rvt.In this project. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. In this table. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. and expand 3D Views. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. click Training Files. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. You do not select a view scale to move it. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close.

notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). 2 In the Project Browser. expand each view type. select Type/Discipline. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 5 On the Views tab.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 8 Select Phase. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . and click Apply. select Discipline.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. In the Project Browser. notice that views are grouped by phase. expand both the Architectural and Structural views.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order.

and click OK. expand each sheet set.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click New. click the Folders tab. 16 Click the Views tab. 12 Click the Sheets tab. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. under Sheets. 13 Select Sheet Prefix.

and click Open. 2 Under Template file. and click OK. When you create a new template based on an existing template. In that case. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. the same rules apply. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. and click OK. click Training Files. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. If you want to save this file. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. expand Complete. Creating an Office Template on page 831. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. When you create new projects. Creating an Office Template | 831 . For example. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. and Discipline. and expand both Architectural and Structural. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. under Views. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. navigate to your preferred directory. you create an office template. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. You can also save these settings in a template file. dimensions styles. You can choose from several templates. enter a unique file name. View Type (Family and Type). 21 In the Project Browser. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. Whenever you create a new project or template. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. levels. In this lesson. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. Proceed to the next lesson. when you create a new project. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. you select the starting point for your office template. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. In the lesson that follows.rte template. and view names. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. expand 3D Views. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. click Browse. and open Metric\Templates. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work.

8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. in the drawing area. 12 Under Template File. When you create the material. select Project template. you modify the project settings for your new template. drag a zoom region around the level heads. 15 Under Create new. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. for Create new. select Project. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. If you have additional projects open. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 9 In the Project Browser. 6 Click OK. For example. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. and double-click North. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. click Browse. 13 Select the default template.5 In the New Project dialog. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. you can select it now. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 7 In the Project Browser. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. In this exercise. close them. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. 14 Click Open. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. and click OK. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. weights. If you want to use a template other than the default. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. Modifying Project Settings on page 832.

You can align. or modify existing patterns. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. line colors. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. rotate. In the Object Styles dialog. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. see the previous lesson. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. including color. and move model patterns. and similar attributes. or refer to the online help. 2 Scroll down the materials list. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. For more details on modifying these settings. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. 13 If necessary. and scroll through the list of categories. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. create and modify them as needed. specific modifications are not dictated. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. Modifying System Settings on page 803. texture. and materials for model objects. the changes are saved as part of the project template. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. create new subcategories. annotation objects. When you create or modify a material. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. transparency. line patterns. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . You can assign a different render appearance to a material. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. or refer to the online help. you can set line weights. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. You do this by defining the render appearance. 4 Click Replace. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. For more information. Observe the materials that are already defined.During this exercise. and imported objects. see a preview of the rendered material. TIP For more information about creating new materials. If you change render appearance properties. 9 Click OK when finished. and change render appearance properties. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811.

modify the line weight. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 34 Click OK. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. and specify the properties. and dimensions. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. such as section lines and dimension lines. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. 20 Click OK. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. You can add and delete view scales. line color. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. create new line subcategories. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. and click Edit. To see the details of a particular style. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. and create new subcategories as needed. 29 Click OK. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. select it. select it from this list. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 19 If necessary.15 Modify categories. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. or line pattern as needed. name the style. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. tags. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. click Duplicate. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 32 To modify a line pattern. 18 For existing line categories.

Volume. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. Linear. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. 55 Click OK. and click OK. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. To see the details of a particular style. 58 Click OK. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. TIP In the drawing area. angular. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 53 For Length. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Format. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 61 Under Doors and Windows. click Duplicate. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. and specify the properties. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. 57 Specify the Slope option. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. 62 Click OK. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. and choose a decimal symbol. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default.40 Click OK. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. In the Tags dialog. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. select it from this list. 46 Click OK. 50 To load new annotation tags. when you add a door with the tag option selected. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. For example. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. name the style. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 60 Under Walls. and Angle settings. click Load.

you can save phases or named print settings in a template. You can find additional information in Help. Links to associated tutorials are provided. In a typical project. or edit existing organization types. rename. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. When you create a new view. However. create new browser organization types. For example. See Setting up If necessary. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. Each command is available on the Settings menu. Medium. Although these settings can be saved within a template. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. click the arrows between columns. 73 Click OK. In such a case. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. Use the table below as a checklist. The detail level is based on view scale. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. 69 If necessary. or Fine. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. or edit existing organization types. 65 Click OK. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. and make modifications in each area as necessary. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. and move view scales as needed. To move the view scales. click the Views tab. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. 68 Delete. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. 64 Review the table. 70 Click the Sheets tab. create new browser organization types. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 72 If necessary. Using the arrows between the columns. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. rename. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 71 Delete. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson.

Depending on the intended use of this template. furniture. In the steps that follow. Although the options are endless. you can set the default contour line interval. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. or add to this selection. do so before starting this exercise. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. You can load any family or group into a template. modify. notice the list of doors already loaded. If necessary. you do both. you could load detail components. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. and the poche depth. the section cut material. Although this is possible. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. or use the Project Browser. you can move onto the next component type. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. you can set up the phases. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. or electrical fixtures. 2 In the Type Selector. you may want to delete. there are some important thoughts to consider. click Door. and electrical fixtures. If this selection is satisfactory. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. For example. However. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For example. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . In addition. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. title blocks. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. if you load every available window type. phase filters.

expand Families. click Load. click Edit/New. In the Element Properties dialog. Click Duplicate. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Select it. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. and click OK. and click OK. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Notice that each family category is listed. Modify type properties. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. create. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. and click OK. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. or load a new door type. and click Open. create. Make modifications. In the Element Properties dialog. click Bar. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Enter a name. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library.3 To modify. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. or modify a door.

This title block is currently part of the template. load. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. In addition. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. To do so. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. 11 On the Options Bar. you create the views required for your template. right-click the component. you created new projects using different templates. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. and click Delete. click 12 Click Preview. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template.) 10 Expand the title block. (Element Properties). 15 Proceed to the next exercise. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. 13 Click OK. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. and select the title block type. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . In this exercise. View Range. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. create. In addition. To load a title block. Discipline. Detail Level. click Load.

and click OK. under Elevations. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. open the view from the Project Browser. 4 If necessary. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. the view is not linked to the template in any way. click Apply. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. and click OK. 12 In the Project Browser. In addition. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. select Site Plan. and then click OK.settings of categories and subcategories. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. select Architectural Plan. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 15 In the Project Browser. you can apply a view template to any view. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. 2 Under Names. In this exercise. double-click Site. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. double-click South. double-click Level 2. Every time a new plan view is created. 11 Click Apply. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. At any time. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 6 Click OK. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Floor Plans. and apply the appropriate template. click Apply. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. you will first modify view templates. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 18 If you modified any other view templates. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. After applying the template. under Floor Plans. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template.

Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter a view name. To orient the 3D view to another view. 24 On the Options Bar. click Orient to a Direction. 30 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. 20 In the Project Browser.Notice the level names. a face. Rename. notice that you have the option to rename. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. 31 Rename the 3D View. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. right-click the ViewCube. or delete this view. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. Blue level heads have associated plan views. If prompted. If you want to modify view properties. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. and select the desired view. under Floor Plans. and click Save View. right-click Level 1. ceiling plans. in the Project Browser. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. review the existing floor plans. click 29 In the Project Browser. 23 To add more levels to the template. use the ViewCube. and click Properties. and click Rename. (Default 3D View). duplicate. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. expand 3D Views. 22 In the Project Browser. By default. right-click the view name. and elevations. review the floor plans. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. 21 In the Project Browser. click Schedule/Quantities. or delete them as needed. duplicate. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. and select the desired direction. on the View toolbar. select Make Plan View. in the shortcut menu. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. If it does not display. To orient the 3D view to a direction. 27 Create additional levels as needed. or an edge of the ViewCube. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. click Level. click Orient to View. under 3D Views. and. under Floor Plans. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . Black level heads have no associated views. right-click the ViewCube. right-click the ViewCube.

Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. and click OK. click Sheet. select one. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. and click OK. modify settings as needed. When you import a DWG or DXF file. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. in the Project Browser. Select a view. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. select the default title block. 37 Click OK. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise.txt for AutoCAD. You are prompted to select a title block. and click Rename. After the sheet is created. click Add View. On the Filter tab. and click Add View to Sheet. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. modify settings as needed. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. To do so. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 42 Create new sheets as needed. Right-click the sheet name. select and order required fields. expand Sheets (all). assign filters. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. modify settings as needed. On the Formatting tab. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. on the View tab of the Design Bar. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. and click OK. select the category type. select the title block and delete it. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. 40 To add views to the sheet.txt for MicroStation). The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers.You can add schedules to a template. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. You can still add views to the sheet. and modify their properties accordingly. or exportlayersdgn. On the Appearance tab. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. To later add a title block to a sheet. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template.

Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . you normally schedule a single category: rooms. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. for example. and they become the set mappings for the project. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. and so on. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. and click Save. 8 In the dialog. doors. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. windows. click Save As. You can save these mappings to a text file. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. When scheduling. and click Save. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. They cannot be shared with other projects. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. When you create a multi-category schedule. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. and so on. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. 9 Click Save As. These settings are retained within the project template. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. select Save As. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. 5 For each category. therefore. When you import a DWG or DXF file. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Using shared parameters. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). name the file. For example. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. name the file. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. and click Save. name the file. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. 2 For each category. and related multi-category tags and schedules. project parameters. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category.

Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 2 Click Create. 14 Click Add. enter a parameter name. 25 Click Select. and specify its discipline and type. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. 9 Name the parameter. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. 24 To add a shared project parameter. 3 Name and save the file. you may want to save the file to a network location. 21 Under Categories. 18 Under Type of Parameter. click New. click New. you can create a list of parameters. and click OK. because each office has a unique set of needs. 5 Enter the group name. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. click Add. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. and select Shared Parameter. If this template will be used by multiple team members. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. 26 Click OK. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. select Project parameter. add required parameters. 17 Under Discipline. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 11 For each parameter group. project parameters. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. and choose a shared parameter. 23 Add project parameters as needed. 22 Click OK. 10 Click OK. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. for Name. 6 Create as many groups as needed. under Groups. select a parameter discipline type. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 8 Under Parameters. 16 Under Parameter Data. select a parameter value type. 19 Under Group parameter under. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. select a group to add parameters to. If a file already exists. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. For each parameter group. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters.

for Name. 35 For Name. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. click Setup. you create named print settings. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. and click Open. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. save the file as a template. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . and click OK. In this exercise. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. or refer to the online help. The tag is now part of the template. For each printer. 5 Click Save As. By going first to the Print command. 6 In the New dialog.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. and print. you can load them into the template. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. and make it your default template file. 4 Modify the printer settings. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 28 Click OK. 34 For Category. 2 Under Printer. click OK. By creating named settings within the template. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. you need only select a setting. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. enter a name for the schedule. paper placement. 32 Navigate to the directory. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. and the percent of actual size. For information on creating multi-category tags. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. 3 Under Settings. click Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. 37 When you have completed the schedule. select the tag. select Multi-Category. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. make minor modifications if necessary.

This can provide a good starting point for a template. select Template Files (*. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. and saved them to a template. By investing the time to individualize your template. In addition. click Setup. In addition. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 24 Navigate to the template location. 19 Select the template. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. If you need to share this file with others. 15 Name the template.rte). 14 Under Save as type. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. If you have a project. and click Save. you ensure that office standards are maintained. The only remaining task is to save it. 9 In the Print dialog.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. loaded components. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and click OK. click Browse. save it in a network location. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Open. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. Create additional settings as needed. click Save as. select it. 18 Click Browse. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 25 Click OK. In this lesson. 23 For Default template file. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 20 Click OK. 22 Click the File Locations tab. You can also set this template as your default template. you modified settings. and create new settings for this printer. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. enter a new name for the printer. modify the printer settings. select a different printer. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. and click Open. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. Your template is complete. 11 Click Close when finished.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful